Example Manual

Australia and New Zealand

November 2013

Legal Notices

Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014

2013 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be

reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.

Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
123D, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, AliasStudio, ATC, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD, Autodesk, the Autodesk logo, Autodesk 123D, Autodesk Homestyler,
Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Beast, BIM
360, Burn, Buzzsaw, CADmep, CAiCE, CAMduct, CFdesign, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content
Explorer, Creative Bridge, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, DesignKids, DesignStudio, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (design/logo), DWG
Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DWGX, DXF, Ecotect, ESTmep, Evolver, FABmep, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare,
Flint, FMDesktop, ForceEffect, FormIt, Freewheel, Fusion 360, Glue, Green Building Studio, Heidi, Homestyler, HumanIK, i-drop, ImageModeler,
Incinerator, Inferno, InfraWorks, Instructables, Instructables (stylized robot design/logo), Inventor LT, Inventor, Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer,
Lustre, MatchMover, Maya, Maya LT, Mechanical Desktop, MIMI, Mockup 360, Moldflow Plastics Advisers, Moldflow Plastics Insight, Moldflow,
Moondust, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA (design/logo), MPA, MPI (design/logo), MPX (design/logo), MPX, Mudbox, Navisworks, ObjectARX,
ObjectDBX, Opticore, Pipeplus, Pixlr, Pixlr-o-matic, Productstream, RasterDWG, RealDWG, ReCap, Remote, Revit LT, Revit, RiverCAD, Robot,
Scaleform, Showcase, ShowMotion, Sim 360, SketchBook, Smoke, Socialcam, Softimage, Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StormNET,
TinkerBox, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, T-Splines, ViewCube, Visual LISP, Visual, VRED, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.

ii

Table of Contents

v.

Introduction

1.

Setup and Configuration

2.

Section Definition

3.

Section Analysis

4.

Beam Definition

5.

Beam Design

6.

Analysis - Model Definition

7.

Analysis - Load Definition & Solution

8.

Transfer of Data

9.

Specialist Analysis Techniques

10. Complete Examples

iii

iv

Introduction
This manual is intended to act as a general guide to the solution of typical examples
in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014. There are ten chapters, each containing
a number of workshop examples that the user can work through using the program,
by following the described procedures. Most workshops are simple and intended for
relatively new users to the system but there are also some more detailed examples
providing an insight into some of the more advanced capabilities of the software.
The document is provided as a pdf file which can be accessed through the help menu
in the software and is generally displayed through a pdf reader such as Adobe
Reader.
The main contents page gives the headings of the main sections. These are
hyperlinked in the document so clicking on a title will take the user directly to the
appropriate section. The first page of each section shows the contents for that
section, listing the workshops included. This is also a hyperlinked page.

Files
Some of the examples require data files to be loaded or opened. All these files can
be found in a compressed zip file located in the SBD\Examples\Version 6\AU Data
Files folder of the software installation. To use these files you must copy the AU
Examples.zip file to a suitable folder on your local hard drive and extract the files to
this location.
At the end of some examples the user is asked to save a data file which may be used
in a subsequent example. To prevent the overwriting of the supplied files different file
names have been used. These files can optionally be used as input instead of the
supplied data files if required.

Projects
An example of setting up a project is given in section 1 and this project template is
saved. All other examples assume that this project is used throughout, giving default
materials, units, titles etc. If you carry out example 1 in section 1 then the Version 6
Examples project will always be available in the list of projects when starting new
problems. If this is not the case or you wish to work on an example without setting up
your own examples project template then this can be loaded from the supplied file
Version 6 Examples.spj when in the Project Templates form.

Semantics
The procedure for each example is given as a series of step by step instructions,
making reference to data form names, field names, user input, menu items etc. To
enhance the readability of these instructions some basic rules have been followed
when preparing these instructions.
1. Text in Bold with a vertical bar separating words indicates a menu item (eg
Options | Project Templates...)

2. Form names ,data field labels and drop down lists are indicated as coloured italic
text such as Define Beam Loading
3. Text in double quotation marks generally indicates a button found on a data form
or user input (eg ...click on the OK button)

Other Useful Information

Having Auto Redraw switched on will mean that the graphics displayed in the
graphics window will be updated automatically as you progress your work.

vi

1. Setup and Configuration

Contents
1.1.
1.2.

Project Setup ............................................................................................................. 1-3

Templates for Multiple Design Codes ........................................................................ 1-7

1-1

1-2

1.1. Project Setup

Subjects Covered:
Design Code; Company Identity; Project Template Titles; Project Template Units;
Project Template Materials; Preferences; Material Properties

Outline
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014 may be used numerous times within a
project and certain data will be common to all jobs within this project. In fact some
data will be common to all projects. Much of this data can be set up as a default by
defining project templates and completing company information which will stored in
the system registry for each user.
In this example we set up the default company information and create two project
templates. One called Version 6 Examples AU with all the necessary titles, units and
materials and another with no settings for title and materials but with default units.

Procedure
1. Start the program.
2. Use the menu item Options|Design Code to select Australian Standards.
3. Open the Set Company Identity form by using the menu item
Options|Company Identity.

4. Enter your Organisation Name and your Office address.

5. Click on the Load button to select a bitmap to display as a logo in the
heading of any output that is produced by the program. Browse to the
examples folder and select the Autodesk logo. Alternatively use your own
logo bitmap.

1-3

6. Click on OK and confirm that the changes should be saved.

7. Open the Preferences form using the menu item Options|Preferences and on
the General tab ensure that the tick boxes on the tab are as shown below.

8. On the Graphics tab of the Preferences form, tick the box for Reverse direction
of plotted Bending Moments , so that BM diagrams are plotted with sagging
moments (Positive) below the beam and switch on Auto Redraw so that
graphics displays are automatically updated. Note that the colours used for the
chart data series can be defined by the user on this tab.
9. Click on OK to close this form.
10. Open the Project Template form using the menu item Options|Project
Templates. Create a new template by clicking the + button. This brings up
a secondary data form which should be set to Default settings before clicking
on OK. Rename the project template to Version 6 Examples - AU by
highlighting the generated name in the Project Template field and re-typing it.

11. Use the same name in the Job Title field and set the Job Number to 1.
12. Select the Units tab. Change the units for velocity to m/s and ensure that
units for acceleration are set to m/s2.
13. Select the Materials tab. Create an Australian concrete material by clicking on
the dropdown list in the first row of the Type column and select Concrete
Parabola-Rectangle. By default this concrete has a characteristic strength of
1-4

40MPa. Change the Characteristic Strength to a value of 32. Click on the

OK button to accept this material.
14. Click in the Type column in the second row to create a second Australian
concrete material, and this time accept the default characteristic strength of
40MPa. Click on OK to accept.
15. Create an Australian reinforcement material using the default values. Click on
OK to accept.
16. Create an Australian Prestressing Strand material, again using the default
values. Click on OK to accept.
17. Create a Structural Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.

18. Click on the Export Template button and save the file as My Version 6
Examples AU.spj.
19. Click on the OK button of the Project Templates form.
20. Close the program.

Summary
The data created in this example will be used as default values when any new job is
started. Of course this data may be changed at any time to reflect local requirements
without affecting the project settings. For example, 32MPa and 40MPa will be default
concrete strengths when using this project template. However, we could alter the
values in the Define Property Details form if a concrete material of say, a 60MPa
compressive strength was required.

1-5

1-6

1.2. Templates for Multiple Design Codes

Subjects Covered:
Default materials for different design codes; Templates from existing templates;
Saving templates.

Outline
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014 may be used for projects that require design
checks to more than one design standard. It is convenient to set up a project
template that contains material data relating to design parameters pertaining to
specific codes of practice. In this way, when a structure, beam or section is defined
using one design code, and then the design code changes, the appropriate materials
are automatically re-assigned.
In this example we use the project template created in example 1.1, called Version 6
Examples - AU, to provide the defaults for a new project template called Multiple
Codes AU. This contains materials relating to Australian Standards only. We then
add additional materials for British design codes and others. It is important to have
the same number of materials for each design code and they must be in the same
order. Finally we export this template to an external file so that it can be loaded by
other users checking our work, or as a backup.

Procedure
1. Start the program.
2. Use the menu item Options|Design Code to select Australian Standards.
3. Click on OK on the information form.
4. Open the Project Template form using the menu item Options|Project
Templates. and make sure the current template is set to Version 6
Examples - AU. Create a new template by clicking the + button. This brings
up a secondary data form which should be set to A Copy of Version 6
Examples - AU before clicking on OK. Rename the project template to
Version 6 Examples - Multiple Codes AU by highlighting the generated name
in the Project Template field and re-typing it. Also, change the Job Title to
Multiple Codes AU in the Job Title field.

1-7

5. Use the same name in the Job Title field and set the Job Number to 1.2.
6. Select the Materials tab and make sure the Design Code field in this form is
set to British Standards then create a concrete material by clicking on the
dropdown list in the first row of the type column and select Concrete
BS5400. By default this concrete has a characteristic cube strength, fcu, of 40
MPa. Click on the OK button to accept this material.

7. Create a second concrete material the same as the first but change the
characteristic cube strength to 50MPa. Click on OK to accept.
8. Create a BS5400 reinforcing material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
9. Create a BS5400 Prestress Strand material, again using the default values.
Click on OK to accept.

10. Create a Structural Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
11. Click on the Design Code drop down menu and select Eurocode from the list.
12. Create a Concrete Parabola-Rectangle material and change the
Characteristic Cube Strength, fck,cube to 40MPa. Click on OK to accept.
Create another concrete property and accept the default Characteristic Cube
Strength of 50MPa. Click on OK to accept.

1-8

13. Create a Reinforcing Steel Inclined material using the default values. Click
on OK to accept.
14. Create a Prestressing Steel Inclined material using the default values. Click
on OK to accept.
15. Create a Structural Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
16. Click on the Design Code drop down menu and select AASHTO from the list.
17. Create a concrete material with a Characteristic Strength to 31.875MPa. Click
on OK to accept. Create another concrete property and change the
Characteristic Strength to 40MPa. Click on OK to accept.
18. Create a Reinforcing Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
19. Create a Prestressing Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
20. Create a Structural Steel material using the default values. Click on OK to
accept.
21. To save this project template for use by other users click on the Export
Template... button and save as a file called Multiple Codes_AU.spj in a
suitable location.
22. Click on the OK button of the project templates form.
23. Close the program.

Summary
The data created in this example is just an illustration of how project templates can be
used for multi-code projects. It also shows how project templates can be saved and
used by other users. This is particularly important when our work is being checked by
others as they may not have the same projects set up. This does not cause a
problem as all data is local to the data file but warning messages will be displayed
warning that the assigned project template could not be found.

1-9

1-10

2. Section Definition
Contents
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.

Simple Edge Section .................................................................................................. 2-3

Voided Slab................................................................................................................ 2-7
Reinforced Concrete Column ................................................................................... 2-11
Plate Girder .............................................................................................................. 2-15
Encased Steel Column............................................................................................. 2-19
Composite Section ................................................................................................... 2-23
Pre-stressed section ................................................................................................ 2-27

2-1

2-2

2.1. Simple Edge Section

Subjects Covered:
Titles; Material property changes; Section Definition; Parametric Shapes; Define
shapes; Inserting points; Arcs

Outline
The shape below is created by using a parametric L section and then modifying by
inserting points, changing vertex coordinates and changing segments to arcs. Grade
32 concrete is assigned to the section.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options|Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section.
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Grillage Edge Section with
a sub-title of Example 2.1. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data
item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties data form using the menu item
Data|Define Material Properties... Delete the structural steel (Redundant
Property) and prestress properties (Prestress Strand) by clicking twice in the
Name field and then using the delete key. Click on OK to close the form.
5. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data| Define Section...

2-3

6. In the first row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic) showing a
rectangular shape. Use the dropdown list to change the shape from rectangle
to L and set the width to 1000mm, the depth to 750mm, the thickness of
horizontal to 200mm and vertical to 250mm.
7. Click on OK to close this secondary form.

8. Using the dropdown list, change the Parametric Shape to Define Shape.
This will display a secondary form and a graphic showing all the vertices and
coordinates.
9. Click on the second point in the vertices (Y) list and notice that the circle
around the point at the bottom right of the L has turned red. This is the
current point. Select the + button to insert a point midway along the bottom
edge of the L.
10. Now click on the fifth point in the vertices list and use the + button to add a
point midway along the top of the bottom flange.
11. Now click on the eighth point in the vertices list and use the + button to add a
point midway along the top edge of the vertical.
12. Change the coordinates in the table to the following;

13. Double click on the Arc tick box for the point (as shown) at the centre of the top
of the vertical to create the curve on the top. Change the Name field to Edge
Section.
2-4

14. Click on OK to close the Define Element Shape form and then select the
grade 32 concrete material from the dropdown list of properties in the Define
Section form.

15. Click on OK to close the Define Section form.

16. Used the menu item File|Save as to save the section with a file name My AU
Example 2_1.sam.
17. Close the program.

Summary
Section shapes can be created in a number of ways. There are many predefined
parametric shapes and standard beams stored in the program library, which can be
used unaltered. These can be converted to a general defined shape and modified.
This example shows how to do this and how to assign a particular material to a
section component.

2-5

2-6

2.2. Voided Slab

Subjects Covered:
Creating Voids, Continuous faces, Reinforcing faces, Manipulation of hook points

Outline
A hole can be created in a section by defining a second component, entirely
contained within the first component and assigning it a void property. If a section is
part of a larger section then the torsion property calculations need to know this, so the
continuous faces must be identified. Reinforcement can be defined relative to a face
with a specific diameter, spacing and cover. The section below can be created to
illustrate all these aspects.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options|Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section....
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Voided Slab Section with a
sub-title of Example 2.2. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item.
Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties form using the menu item Data|Define
Material Properties... Delete the structural steel (Redundant property) and
prestress properties (Prestress Strand) by clicking twice in the Name field and
then using the delete key. Click on OK to close the Define Material Properties
form.

2-7

Click twice and press

the delete key to delete
this entry

5. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data| Define Section...
6. In the first row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic) showing a
rectangular shape. Use the dropdown list to select Rectangle (if it is not
selected automatically) and set the width to 1200mm and depth to 900mm.
Click on OK to close this secondary form.
7. Assign Grade 32 concrete to this component by using the drop down selection
of the Property field.
8. Click on the two vertical edges (once) and the solid lines change to dashed
lines. This signifies that these are continuous faces.

Click once
to make
dashed
9. Create a second parametric component using the drop down list in the field
and change the shape to Circle (in the Shape Reference field) with a
diameter of 550mm. Close this form using the OK button.
10. Change the Hook point number for both components to 0.
11. Change the X Coord and Y Coord of both components to 0.

2-8

12. Leave the Property of the second component as Void as this will form the
hole and then close the Define Section form using the OK button.
13. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form from the Data|Define Bars... menu
item.
14. Change the Generate option to Reinforce Faces and change Position By to
Exact Spacing with a spacing of 100mm.
15. Set the Bar diameter to 40mm and then click on the bottom face of the
rectangle in the graphics window to display a data form allowing the definition
of the reinforcement cover. Set this cover to 50mm and then close the form
using OK. (Click OK on any message that may appear regarding
non-standard bar diameters).

2-9

16. Note that the reinforcement material property is automatically selected (but
could be changed if a second reinforcement property is defined).
17. Close the Define Bars and Tendons form using OK.
18. Save the data file using the File|Save as... menu item as My AU Example
2_2.sam.
19. Close the program.

Summary
Voided slab sections are often used to represent the longitudinal stiffness of a grillage
beams. It is important that the torsion properties are calculated correctly and that if
Cracked section properties are required then the reinforcement is correctly defined.

2-10

2.3. Reinforced Concrete Column

Subjects Covered:
Reinforcement to two covers; Snapping to reinforcement; editing reinforcement cover
and size

Outline
A simple reinforced concrete section is required to represent a section of a column
as shown below. Initially 24mm bars are placed in the positions shown below. This is
done by placing a bar in each corner, with the appropriate cover, and then using these
bars as snap points drawing a number of bars between them. This creates duplicate
bars in the corners but these are automatically deleted when the form is closed.
It is then realised that 32mm bars should have been used instead. The bars are
edited to change the diameter but then the cover needs adjusting back to 46mm.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options|Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section....
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as RC Column Section with a
sub-title of Example 2.3. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item.
Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the materials data form using the menu item Data|Define Material
Properties... Delete the structural steel and prestress properties by clicking
twice in the name field and then using the delete key. Click on OK to close
the Define Material Properties form.
5. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data| Define Section...
2-11

6. In the first row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic) showing a
rectangular shape. Use the dropdown list to select Rectangle and set the
width to 500mm and depth to 400mm. Click on OK to close this secondary
form.
7. Assign Grade 32 concrete to this component by using the drop down selection
of the Property field.
8. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form from the Data|Define Bars... menu
item.
9. Change the Generate option to 1 bar by 2 covers and change Diameter to
24mm.

10. Click on one of the corners of the rectangle in the graphics window to display a
data form allowing the definition of the reinforcement cover. Set this cover to
46mm on both faces and then close the form using OK.

11. Repeat step 9 for the other three corners noting that the cover is automatically
set to the last defined.
12. Change the Generate option to Draw Bars and set Position By to Number.
Set the No. of bars to 4 and leave the Diameter as 24mm.
13. In the graphics window toolbar, set the snap option to Bar/tendon then click
on the bottom left hand bar in the graphics window followed by the bottom right
hand bar. This will create an extra 4 bars, 2 of which will be superimposed on
the corner bars.
2-12

First click
Second
click

Snap
mode

14. Repeat this with the two top corner bars.

15. Change the No. of bars to 3 and draw in the bars along the remaining two
vertical edges in the same way.
16. Close the Define Bars and Tendons form using the OK button and a message
should be displayed saying Superimposed bars have been deleted.
17. Re-open the Define Bars and Tendons form using the menu item Data|Define
Bars...
18. Click on the Edit bars.. button and then draw a window around all bars in the
graphics window by clicking once in one corner and then clicking again in the
opposite corner of the rectangular section. The bars should turn red and a
secondary Edit Reinforcement form should be displayed. Change the Edit
Option to Change bar diameter and set the Bar Diameter to 32mm. Close the
Edit Reinforcement form using the OK button and the bars are updated.

19. The cover to these bars has then been reduced to 42mm so we need to move
the bars to re-establish 46mm cover. This can also be done using the Edit
Bars... button but can only be done one face at a time. Click on Edit Bars...
and then window round the topmost row of bars. Change the Edit Option to
Reset Cover in the Edit Reinforcement data form and set the cover to 46mm
before closing the form with the OK button. The cover to these bars has now
been adjusted.
2-13

20. This can be repeated for the bottom row of bars and each side row,
remembering to click on the Edit Bars... button each time before selecting the
appropriate bars. Close the Define Bars and Tendons form using the OK
button.
21. The data can then be saved, using the menu item File|Save as..., to a file
called My AU Example 2_3.sam.
22. Close the program.

Summary
This is a simple example that illustrates the creation of a reinforced section which is
then needed to be modified. This is a process that can happen frequently in a real
design cycle. For this simple section it would probably be just as simple to delete the
bars and re-specify them but for more complex sections this may be time consuming.

2-14

2.4. Plate Girder

Subjects Covered:
Multiple components; joining components; copying components; rotating components;
using Shove to locate components accurately; User defined library shapes.

Outline
The shape below is created by using a parametric I section and then adding four
parametric Angle shapes as the cleats. Standard structural steel properties are
applied to all components. The section is edited using the join facility to combine the
components into one defined shape.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options|Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section.
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Cleated Plate Girder
Section with a sub-title of Example 2.4. Also add your initials to the
Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
4. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data| Define Section...
2-15

5. In the first row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic) showing a
rectangular shape. Use the dropdown list to change the shape from
Rectangle to I and set the width of both flanges to 500mm, the overall
height to 900mm, the thickness of top & bottom flanges to 40mm and the
thickness of the web to 20mm. Click on OK to close this secondary form.
6. Resize the graphics window to a reasonable size by clicking on the corner of
the window and with the mouse button held down, drag to the new position.
Zoom the graphics so that the shape fits the new screen size by clicking on the
fit view button in the toolbar of the graphics window.

Fit View
7. In the second row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. Use the dropdown list to change the shape from rectangle to
L and set the width and height to 75mm and the thicknesses of both
horizontal and vertical to 12mm. Click on OK to close this secondary form.
8. The angle will appear in red with a circle shown at the reference point. Click
once on this little circle, releasing the mouse button, and drag the shape to a
new location beneath the top flange and to the right of the web, as show below.
Place the angle at this location by clicking the left mouse button again.

Copy

Shove Left

Rotate
9. Use the rotate edit button to orientate the angle with the arms pointing to the
right and vertically down (This could be achieved by entering the angle in the
correct column in the table).
10. Now use the Shove Up and Shove Left edit buttons to locate the angle in its
final position.
11. Now use the Copy icon in the graphics toolbar to create a second angle
component and repeat 8, 9 and 10 to place it in the top left internal corner.
12. This can be repeated twice more to place angles into the bottom internal
corners.

2-16

13. At the moment, all components have a material property void, so apply the
Steel property to all components.
14. Although this section can be left as five separate components it may
sometimes be desirable to join these components into one shape. This is done
by selecting one of the angle components and then using the Join edit toolbar
button to combine it with the component touching or overlapping with it. This is
then repeated with the other three angles to give the one define shape
component. (The user may find that clicking just once on the Join button
simultaneously joins all of the components together).
Rotate

Shove
Join

15. Open up the Define shape form by clicking on define shape and re-selecting it
from the drop down list. Change the name to 500 by 900 plate girder then
click on the Add button to add it to a library file. This will open a file browser
form which will allow you to choose an existing library file, if it exists, or to
create a new one. We will create a new one by entering a library file name of
My Useful_Sections.lib and then clicking on the save button.
16. Close the Define Element Shape data form using the OK button.
17. Click on OK to close the Define Section form.
18. Use the menu item File|Save as... to save the section with a file name My AU
Example 2_4.sam.
19. Close the program.

Summary
Sections can be built by combining many different simple components to create more
complicated shapes. For composite sections where the components have different
material properties then the components will remain as individual entities but if the
material is the same they may be joined to form a single shape. This will allow the
section to be stored as a single user defined library section.
The edit toolbar on the graphics window provides many tools for manipulating
components of a section.

2-17

2-18

2.5. Encased Steel Column

Subjects Covered:
Enclosing one section in another, adjusting material properties; Universal Columns;
Import shape from Autodesk AutoCAD; Copying components

Outline
An oval shaped concrete column casing, with major axis 800mm and minor axis
600mm is cast concentrically around a steel Universal Column (310 UC 158) as
shown below. The concrete is grade 25 and the structural steel has a yield strength
of 350MPa and elastic modulus 200kN/mm2.
The oval outline has previously been created in AutoCAD and saved in a dxf file. This
can be imported into the program before adding the standard steel shape. This shape
is added twice, once with void properties (to create a hole in the concrete) and a
second time with steel properties.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options|Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section.
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Encased steel section with
a sub-title of Example 2.5. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data
item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties form using the menu item Data| Define
Material Properties... and then open the Property Details for the grade 32
concrete by clicking on it in the table. Change the Characteristic Strength to
2-19

25MPa and then click the OK button on both the Define Property Details
and Define Properties form to close the forms and ensure that any changes are
saved.
5. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data| Define Section... . In
the first row of the Library column select Import Shapes from the dropdown list
which will open a file browser. Navigate to the file called Example 2_5
Elipse.dxf and open it. Click the Next button on the Import Shapes form
which has appeared on the screen. This will display the general define shape
in the graphics window and show the coordinates in the data form. Enter a
Name for this component as Encased Concrete in the Define Element Shape
form and close it with the OK button.
6. Assign a material property from the Property column drop down list as the
25MPa concrete.
7. In the second row of the Library column select Steel Sections from the
dropdown list which will open a secondary form in which Australian Sections
are chosen and a Universal Column is selected from the choice of Steel
Section Range. The serial size is set to 310 UC with a weight of 158kg.
Close the Define Section Details form with the OK button.
8. For both the section components change the hook point to number 0 and set
the coordinates to (0,0). Zoom the image in the graphics window to fit the
screen using the Fit View toolbar button.
9. If the steel section is not already set, then set the focus on the steel section by
clicking on it (it will turn red if a line becomes a dashed line then click on it
again to make it a solid line). Use the Copy toolbar button to create a
second instance of this shape
. Set the Property of this
second shape to be that of Steel and again set the Hook point to 0 and the
coordinates to (0,0).

10. Close the Define Section form using the OK button and then use the menu
item File|Save as... to save the section with a file name My AU Example
2_5.sam.

2-20

11. Close the program.

Summary
This method is the easiest way of enclosing one shape within another as the Merge
facility used in example 2.7 only works when boundaries overlap with each other.
This process can be repeated several times to create sections such as a concrete
tube enclosed between two concentric steel tubes of different radii.
A second method, which may be necessary in some circumstances, is to create the
encasing component as a single component, without a void component, by applying a
split between the external and internal surfaces (look at the parametric shape of an
annulus as an example). Alternatively the encasement can be made up of a number
of separate components, touching at the boundaries (e.g. a box section made up from
two rectangular webs and two rectangular flanges), although this would not represent
the torsion properties correctly.

2-21

2-22

2.6. Composite Section

Subjects Covered:
Multiple components with different materials; Standard steel library shapes; Reinforce
faces; Hook Points

Outline
A composite steel girder and concrete slab is shown below. The slab is 200mm thick
and the effective width is 1500mm. Reinforcement is placed in the bottom of the slab
using 12 no. 24mm diam. Bars, equally spaced with 50mm cover to the bottom face.
The steel girder is a standard steel welded beam section classified as 900 WB 282.
Grade 32 concrete is used for the slab and the standard steel and reinforcement
materials are applied respectively. The slab is part of a wider continuous slab.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options|Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section.
3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Composite steel/concrete
Section with a sub-title of Example 2.6. Also add your initials to the
Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Section data form using the menu item Data| Define
Section...
5. In the first row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic) showing a
rectangular shape. Set the width to be 1500mm and the height to 200mm,
and then click on OK to close this secondary form. The slab is to be
2-23

positioned so that the midpoint of the bottom face is to be at the origin. This is
done by changing the Hook Point to be -1 and then setting the coordinates to
(0,0).
6. The two short edges of the slab are identified as continuous faces by clicking
once on each (they turn to dashed lines) and the material for the slab is set to
grade 32 concrete by using the drop down list in the Property column.
7. In the second row of the Library column select Steel Sections from the
dropdown list. Use the dropdown list to ensure that the Steel Sections Library
is set to Australian Sections and the Steel section range to Welded Beam.
Then select the Serial size as 900 WB and the weight to 282kg. Select
Steel from the Property dropdown menu. Close the form by clicking on the
OK button. Select Steel from the Property dropdown menu.
8. To locate the top of the flange at the centre of the underside of the slab,
change the Hook Point of the steel section to -5 and set the coordinates to
(0,0). The material of the steel beam should be set to the structural steel
property.

9. Close the Define Section form by clicking on the OK button.

10. Open the Define Bars form using the menu bar item Data|Define Bars. Set the
Generate field to Reinforce face(s), set the number of bars to 12, set the bar
diameter to be 24mm and then click on the bottom edge of the slab, which will
open a secondary data form.

Click on
Bottom
Face

2-24

11. In this form set the cover to be 50mm and the number of faces to be 1 and
then click on OK to draw the bars.

12. Close the Define Bars and Tendons data form using the OK button.
13. Use the menu item File|Save as to save the section with a file name My AU
Example 2_6.sam.
14. Close the program.

Summary
Sections can be built by combining many different simple components to create more
complicated shapes. Special libraries have been built containing the major shapes for
steel sections which can be used to build up the section. This covers UK, American,
Australian, European and Japanese standard sections.

2-25

2-26

2.7. Pre-stressed section

Subjects Covered:
Precast concrete beams; Tendon definition and placement; Section outline from text
file; Initial Prestress forces; Arcs; Merging; Hook points;

Outline
It is required to generate a section of a precast edge beam comprising of a standard
I-Girder Type 2 precast beam (Grade 40 concrete) and an insitu slab and edge detail
(Grade 32 concrete) as shown below. The section is created using 3 components, 1)
a standard precast section from a built in library, 2) a parametric rectangular section
for the slab, 3) a general defined shape with specific coordinates for the edge detail
and 4) an infill piece of concrete. These sections will overlap so they must be merged
to eliminate the duplicated material.
Two rows of tendons are placed in the bottom of the beam (8 in the bottom row and 6
in the second) together with two tendons in the top. The bottom row is placed 60mm
from the bottom face of the beam with the end tendons 50mm from the vertical faces.
The second row is placed 110mm from the bottom face of the beam. The top two
tendons are placed 870mm from the bottom face. Each tendon (Grade 1750) is
initially stressed to 188kN.
X

-100

1350

-350

1350

-400

1100

-550

850

-554

753

-450

690

-100

690

-100

1350

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options|Projects Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File|New Section....
2-27

3. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Prestressed Section with a
sub-title of Example 2.7. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item.
Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties data form using the menu item
Data|Define Material Properties... Delete the structural steel by clicking twice
in the name field and then using the delete key. Open the data form for the
prestress material and ensure that the Tensile Strength is set to 1750MPa.
(This strength could be changed if required, but the default strength is used in
this example).

5. Click the OK button on both the Define Property Details and the Define
Material Properties form to close both forms and ensure that any changes are
saved.
6. Open the Define Section data form using the menu item Data| Define
Section...
7. In the first row of the Library column select Concrete Beams from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic showing a
standard bridge beam). Ensure that Australian Sections is selected. Use the
dropdown list Concrete beam range to select a I-Girder and set the Shape no.
to Type 2 Fig H1(A). Click on OK to close this secondary form.

8. Assign Grade 40 concrete to this component by using the drop down selection
of the Property field.
2-28

9. In the second row of the Define Section form create a second component by
picking Parametric Shape from the dropdown list. Set the width to 600mm
and the depth to 160mm. Assign Grade 32 concrete to this component.
10. Now manipulate the positions of the components so that the origin is at the
midpoint of the bottom face of the beam. This is done by setting the hook point
of the concrete beam section to -1 and setting the coordinates to (0,0). The
insitu slab can be positioned by also setting the hook point to -1 and the
coordinates to (200,870) (allowing 30mm for permanent formwork above the
rebate).

Merge

11. The two components overlap, so, to cut out the insitu slab around the beam,
select the slab in the list of components and, in the graphics window toolbar,
click on the Merge button.
12. An insitu infill concrete component is now defined. Create a third component,
using the dropdown list in the Library column, as a parametric shape. Set the
width to 400mm and the depth to 900mm. Assign Grade 32 concrete to this
component.
13. With the hook point set as 1 for this third component, set the X Coord to
-350. Use the Merge button to shape the infill concrete to the profile of the
girder.
14. The insitu edge detail now needs to be defined. Create a fourth component,
using the dropdown list in the Library column, as a define shape. The
coordinates, as defined in the table above, can be entered by either typing the
coordinates directly into the shape coordinates table (using the + button to
add a row), or by entering the coordinates into a text file such as notepad,
copying them to the clipboard (Control/C) and then using the right mouse
button menu option in the coordinate table, pasting them in. Set the section
name to Edge Detail.
15. A more accurate shape can be given by fitting arcs where appropriate. Tick
the arc box in rows 3 & 5 and click on OK to close the Define Element Shape
form. A form appears telling you that the sections intersect. Click the OK
button on this form.

2-29

16. Assign Grade 32 concrete to this component.

17. Again the two components overlap, so, to cut out the edge detail around the
beam, select the Edge Detail in the list of components and, in the graphics
window toolbar, click on the Merge button. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Section form. Click No on the Confirm form for this example.
18. To define the tendons select the menu item Data|Define Bars.
19. Select 1 tendon by 2 covers from the dropdown list in the Generate field and
set the area of strand to 143mm2. In the graphics window click on the left
vertical face of the precast girder (becomes bold) and then on the bottom face
which displays a secondary form. Set the Cover to face 1 to 50mm and
Cover to face 2 to 60mm. Click OK on the Locate Tendon form. Notice that
the force in the tendon is 188kN (but this could be changed as necessary).
Repeat this for the bottom right corner of the beam. Repeat on the bottom right
corner with covers to face 1 and 2 100mm and 110mm respectively and
then again on the bottom left.

Face 1

Face 2

20. Select Draw tendons from the dropdown list in the Generate field and change
the snap option in the graphics window toolbar to bar/tendon. Set Position By
to Number and No. of tendons to 8. Now click on the bottom left hand
tendon in the graphics window and then again on the bottom right (generating
11 extra tendons with superimposed tendons in the corners). Repeat this for
the second row but setting the No. of tendons to 6.

2-30

21. The top two tendons are created by using 1 tendon by 2 covers option and
selecting the vertical and bottom edges of the bottom flange with covers of
175mm and 850mm for both corners.
22. Close the Define Bars and Tendons form using the OK button. An
information message is displayed informing that superimposed tendons have
been automatically removed.
23. Use the menu data item File|Save As to save the data file as My AU Example
2_7.sam.
24. Close the program.

Summary
This section is now ready for section property calculations and stress analysis. The
example shows the build up of components, using merge, arc, and hook point
facilities as well as illustrating the use of standard library shapes. The edge detail
illustrates the ability to cut and paste geometry from a spread sheet or text file.
Inserting tendons demonstrated that a tendon could be placed with respect to two
faces (which dont have to be contiguous). The default tendon force is calculated
from the characteristic strength, the initial percentage and the tendon area, although
this will generally be adjusted to take care of losses.

2-31

2-32

3. Section Analysis
Contents
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.

General Section Properties ..................................................................................... 3-3

Torsion & Shear Section Properties ...................................................................... 3-13
Differential Temperature ....................................................................................... 3-19
ULS Capacity and stresses of an RC Section ....................................................... 3-23
Crack Width & Stress Calcs of an RC Section ...................................................... 3-31
General Stress Strain Analysis.............................................................................. 3-37
Stresses at transfer of a prestress section ............................................................ 3-43
Interaction Curves for Columns ............................................................................. 3-49

3-1

3-2

3.1. General Section Properties

Subjects Covered:
Gross section properties; Transformed section properties; Net Transformed section
properties; Full plastic moments; Moving the section origin; Reinforcement bar
translation.; Results viewer; PDF results viewer

Outline
The calculation of section properties for three of the sections defined in section 2 will
be considered as follows:
Calculate

Section properties of the gross section (neglecting

any difference between material properties).

Section Properties of the transformed section

(transformed to grade 32 concrete).

Transformed bending Inertia Ixx about an axis

200mm below the bottom of the slab (the global
centroid axis of the complete bridge deck cross
section).

Example 2.6

Calculate

Net transformed Ixx (cracked section properties)

transformed to grade 32 concrete.

Example 2.2

Calculate

Full plastic moment of the section according to

AS5100.

Example 2.4

3-3

Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU
Example 2_6.sam created in example 2.6.
2. Use the menu item Data Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title to
Example 3.1a and the Job Number to 3.1a. Click on OK to close the Titles
form.
3. Ensure that Analysis Type is set to Section Properties by using the menu item
Data |Analysis Type then use the menu Calculate |Analyse to open the
Calculate Section Properties form.

Gross Section Properties

4. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select Gross Section from
the list. This will display the results shown below.

5. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results as a text file. This can
be saved as a Rich Text Format (rtf) file if required.
6. Click on the PDF View tab at the bottom of the results viewer to display the
results with the graphics in the form of a PDF document. This can then be
saved as a PDF file if required. Page numbering, User defined titles and
margins can be configured using the Preferences button at the top of the
viewer.

3-4

7. Close the results viewer using the green EXIT Button at the top.

Transformed Section Properties

8. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select Transformed section.
This will display the results shown below.

3-5

9. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results.

10. Close the results viewer.
11. Click on OK to close the Calculate Section Properties form.

Section Properties about a specified axis

For properties about a specific axis we need to define the origin of the section
at the level of the required axis. One set of properties calculated are about the
global axes.
12. Use the Data |Define Section... menu to open the Define Section form.
13. In the first row, change the Y coordinate to 200.
14. In the second row, change the Y coordinate to 200.

15. Click OK to close the Define Section form.

16. Use the Data |Define Bars menu to open the Define Bars and Tendons form.
17. Click on the Edit bars... button.
18. Click once on the graphics window to the bottom left of the section, then move
the mouse until the selection box contains all the bars. Click again to select
the bars which will be highlighted in red. The Edit Reinforcement form will
open.

3-6

19. Click on the Edit Option drop down menu and select X-Y Translation.

20. Change the value in the Translation dimensions y field to 200.

21. Click on OK to move the tendons and close the Edit Reinforcement form.
22. Click on OK to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.
23. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Calculate Section Properties
form.
24. Click on the Section properties for drop down and select Transformed section.
This will display the results shown below.

3-7

25. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results and scroll down the page
until the table for Transformed Section area & Properties about global axes (through x=0,y=0):
is shown

26. Close the results viewer.

27. Click on OK to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
28. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save As form.
29. Change the filename to My AU Example3_1a.sam And click on the Save
button.

Net Transformed Section Properties

30. Use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU Example 2_2.sam created
in example 2.2.
31. Use the menu item Data |Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title
to Example 3.1b and the Job Number to 3.1b. Click on OK to close the
Titles form.
32. Select the menu item Data |Analysis type |Section Properties.
33. Use the menu Calculate |Analyse to open the Calculate Section Properties
form.

3-8

34. Click on the Section properties for drop down list and select Transformed
section.
35. Click on the Transformed to drop down list and select MP1: C32 Es 31.3.
This will display the results shown below:

36. Click OK to close the Calculate Section Properties form.

37. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save As form.
38. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_1b.sam And click on the Save
button.

Plastic Section Properties

39. Use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU Example 2_4.sam created
in example 2.4
40. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.1c and
the Job Number to 3.1c. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
41. Select the menu item Data |Analysis type |Section Properties. Use the
Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Calculate Section Properties form.
42. Click on the Section properties for: drop down and select Plastic section.
Also set the Transformed to: field to the Structural Steel material. The form will
now display the results shown below.

3-9

43. Click on the Results button to see the detailed results for the Plastic Modulus
of the Section.
The results file is shown below:

This indicates that section properties are calculated according to the rules in
Clause 6.3.3 of AS5100 Part 6. The Plastic Moment is 8094kNm.
44. Close the results viewer and the Calculate Section Properties form by clicking
the OK button on the Calculate Section Properties form.
45. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save As form.

3-10

46. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_1c.sam And click on the Save
button.
47. Close the program.

Summary
The calculation of section properties is very easy, but very powerful as gross,
transformed and cracked section properties can be obtained. The choice of which
property to use will depend on the type of analysis to be performed using these
properties.
Reinforced concrete sections for Ultimate Limit State calculations will generally use
gross properties whereas Composite steel and Prestressed concrete sections will
normally be transformed. Net transformed properties (cracked) are most useful when
considering the deflections of a reinforced concrete structure.
Fully Plastic Moments and Modulus of a steel section are useful as input to a plastic
hinge analysis of a structure and would be applied as Member Limits in a structural
analysis using Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014.

3-11

3-12

3.2. Torsion & Shear Section Properties

Subjects Covered:
Torsion Constant; Shear Area; Shear Centre;

Outline
It is required to calculate torsion and shear section properties for three of the sections
defined in section 2 as follows:
Calculate

The torsion constant for this voided slab section (taking

50% of the beam value as it is to be used in a grillage)

The torsion constant as above but ignore the

continuous edges
(Use a torsion grid of 20 by 20)

Calculate

The transformed torsion constant for this encased

column (transformed to concrete units)
(Use a torsion grid of 100 by 50 for the
concrete and 100 by 200 for the steel column)

Calculate

The shear areas in both x and y direction

The shear centre coordinates

(Use a grid of 100 by 100)
Poissons Ratio = 0.3

Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File|Open to open the file AU
Example 2_2.sam created in example 2.2.

3-13

Voided Slab
2. Use the menu item Data|Titles to open the Titles form. Change the Sub-title to
Example 3.2a and the Job Number to 3.2a. Click on OK to close the Titles
form.
3. Use the menu Data|AnalysisType to set the analysis type to Torsion and
shear.
4. Use the menu item Calculate|Analyse to open the Calculate Torsion and
Shear form.
5. Click in the Divisions in X direction field and enter a value of 20. Click in the Y
direction field and enter a value of 20.
6. Click on the Display results for drop down menu and select Torsion Stress
Function from the list. Click on the Analyse button.

7. Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer. Note that 50% of C =
1.3069E11mm4. Close the viewer.
8. Click the OK button to close the Calculate Torsion And Shear form.
9. Use the menu item Data|Define section to open the Define Section form.
10. On the first row of the table, click in the Library column and select Parametric
Shape from the drop down list. This will open the Define Section Details form.
Click on the OK button to automatically change the section to a discontinuous
section.
11. Click on the OK button to close the Define Section form.
12. Use the Calculate|Analyse menu to open the Calculate Torsion And Shear
form. Click on the Analyse button. Click on the Results button to display the
Results Viewer.
Note that 50% of C = 0.66865E11mm4
3-14

13. Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Torsion And Shear form.
14. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
15. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_2a.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.

Elliptically Encased Steel Column

16. Use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU Example 2_5.sam created
following the steps in example 2.5.
17. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.2b and
the Job Number to 3.2b. Click on the OK button to close the Titles form.
18. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu item to set the analysis type to Torsion
and Shear.
19. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Calculate Torsion And Shear
form.
20. Click in the Divisions in X direction field and enter a value of 100. Click in the
Y direction field and enter a value of 50.
21. Click on the Analyse button.
Note that the value of C in Concrete units is 1.87E10mm4.

3-15

22. Click in the Y direction field and enter a value of 200. Click in the Element to
be analysed field and enter a value of 3 (this is the steel column).
23. Click on the Analyse button. Note that the value of C in Steel units is
3.82E6mm4. To convert this to concrete units we multiply by the modular ratio
of the elastic modulus = 200/27.6844 = 7.22.
Therefore C of steel section in concrete units is 2.758E7
The combined C is the sum of the two components = 1.87E10
This is a lower bound value as it is assumed that in torsion, the two
components are not acting compositely and warping is not constrained.
24. Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Torsion and Shear form.
25. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
26. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_2b.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.

Shear Centre & Area of RC Edge Section

27. Use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU Example 2_1.sam created
following the steps in example 2.1.
28. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.2c and
the Job Number to 3.2c. Click on the OK button to close the Titles form.
29. Use the menu Data |Analysis Type to set the analysis type to Torsion and
shear.
30. Use the menu item Calculate |Analyse, to open the Calculate Torsion and
Shear form.
31. Click in the Divisions in X direction field and enter a value of 100. Click in the
Y direction field and enter a value of 100.
3-16

32. Click on the Display results for drop down menu and select Shear Stress
Function from the list. Click on the Analyse button.

Note that the shear centre is given on the analysis form at coordinates (209,
207) and is shown by a symbol on the graphic display.
The shear area calculated, 63139mm2, is that associated with a shear force
applied parallel to the y (vertical) axis.
The shear stress distribution due to a vertical force of 1kN can be shown
graphically by changing Display results for: to Shear stress YZ (for vertical
shear stresses) or Shear Stress XZ (for horizontal shear stresses) and clicking
the Analyse button.
Close the Calculate Torsion And Shear data form with the OK button.
To calculate the shear area in the X (Horizontal) direction, the section must be
rotated around by 90 degrees. This is simply done by opening up the Define
Section form using the menu Data | Define Section.... and entering 90
degrees in the Rotation column of the single component. The Hook point
coordinates should also be set to (250, 0) so that the origin is in the same
relative place. Close the Define Section form with the OK button.
33. Open up the Analysis form again, set Display results for: to Shear Stress
Function and click on the Analyse button.

3-17

Note that the shear centre is given as (207, -209) which is the same as before
except rotated by 90 degrees.
The shear area is, 92476mm2, and is that associated with a shear force applied
parallel to the horizontal axis in the original section orientation.
Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Torsion and Shear form.
Use the File|Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
Change the filename to My AU Example 3_2c.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.
34. Close the program.

Summary
The first example shows the effect on the torsion constant of including the
specification of continuous edges. This almost doubles the value. The 50% value
would be used in a grillage analysis because the transverse members would also
have a torsion stiffness so the total torsion stiffness is split between longitudinal and
transverse members (hence 50%).
The second example illustrates how to deal with sections made up from multiple
components having different material properties. (If they were of the same material we
could have just joined them). The program cannot deal with composite sections
directly in one pass but if we make a few assumptions, many sections can be
analysed by considering both sections separately and using a modular ratio to
combine them into one torsion constant transformed to one of the materials.
The third example illustrates how to obtain shear stress distribution in a section with
the shear centre coordinates and shear areas.

3-18

3.3. Differential Temperature

Subjects Covered:
AS5100 Temperature Profile; Restraining Moments; Primary differential temperature
stresses; User defined profile.

Outline

The composite section shown above has been defined and saved in example 2.6 with
a slight modification to include a 200mm by 200mm upstand on the left hand edge
constructed with grade 32 concrete. The previously defined continuous face on this
edge is made non-continuous. A standard temperature gradient, according to
AS5100, is applied to the section but it requires modifying it to take account of the
upstand, as shown above. It is assumed that the temperature in the upstand will be
constant and at the same value as that at the top of the slab. The effect of the
reinforcement is to be included in the calculations.
It is required to determine:

The overall restraining moments and axial forces for both positive and
negative cases.

The unrestrained (self equilibrating) primary stresses at the top and

bottom of each of the three components for both positive and negative
cases.

Procedure
1. Start the program and click on the menu item File |Open... to open the file AU
Example 2_6.sam created in section 2.6 of this guide.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.3 Differential Temperature and the Job Number to 3.3. Click on OK to close
the Titles form.

3-19

3. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data | Define Section...

Add Upstand Edge Detail

4. In the third row of the Library column select Parametric Shape from the
dropdown list. This will display a secondary form (with graphic) showing a
rectangular shape. Set the width and depth to 200mm then click on OK to
close the form. The edge detail is positioned by setting Hook point 1
coordinates to (-750,200).
5. The material for the edge detail is set to grade 32 concrete using the drop
down list in the Property column.
6. The left hand edge of the slab is made non-continuous by clicking on the slab
component in the table, to get focus, then clicking on the left hand edge of the
slab. This will change it from a dashed to a solid line. Click on OK to close
the Define Section form.
7. Use the menu item Data |Analysis Type to set the analysis type to Differential
Temperature.

Apply Temperature Profile

8. Select the menu item Data |Define Loads |Temperature |AS5100.2 17.3...
9. Click on the Bridge Type drop down and select Concrete slab on steel trough,
box, or I girders. Click OK on the warning message. Click on OK to close
the AS5100.2 17.3 Differential Temperature form.

This shows a profile as defined in AS5100 but the program assumes the top of
the section is the top of the upstand. We therefore need to lower this profile so
the top of it is aligned to the top of the slab. We also need to add a constant
temperature portion from the top of the slab to the top of the upstand.
10. Select the menu item Data |Define Loads |Temperature |Defined Profile...
This allows the temperature profile to be modified.

3-20

11. In the Positive Temperature Diff and Reverse Temperature Diff columns,
change the height and temperature values to those shown below. It is easiest
to click on the Clear button and then start at the top row in the Temperature
column of the Positive Temperature Diff table and work your way down. For
this example the values in the rows below the top 4 rows will be set to zero.

Click on OK to close the Define Differential Temperature Profile form.

12. Select the menu item Calculate |Analyse and Autodesk Structural Bridge
Design 2014 will automatically calculate the Relaxing moments and Axial
loads, showing them on the displayed form. Untick the Ignore reinforcement?
check box to include the effect of reinforcement in the calculations.

13. Click on the Results button to see all the results including the self equilibrating
stresses.

3-21

14. Close the results viewer and click on OK on the Calculate Temperature
Stresses form to close it.
15. Select the File |Save As... option and change the filename to My AU Example
3_3.sam then click on the Save button to save the updated section file.
16. Close the program.

Summary
This example shows how to define a user specific temperature profile on a composite
steel/concrete section.
If a beam, made up from this section and temperature profile, was fully constrained
along its length then the following forces and moments would be induced along the
span:
Temp rise
Temp fall
M Sagging F Comp
M Sagging F Tension
232kNm
3000kN
-54kNm
-554kN
The self equilibrating Primary Stresses at the top and bottom of each component can
be seen in the results shown above.

3-22

3.4. ULS Capacity and stresses of an RC Section

Subjects Covered:
Reinforce faces; 1 bar by 2 covers; Nominal Load; Gamma factors; Biaxial bending;
ULS Shear design

Outline
Ultimate limit state section capacities, for moments and axial force, are to be
calculated for two of the sections defined in section 2 as follows:

This precast section has 7no. 24mm bars in the

bottom faces with 50mm cover. The end bars have
50mm cover to the vertical faces. Additionally, 2no.
16mm bars are placed in the top of the upstand
with 50mm cover to both faces.

The precast beam is lifted at its ends through the

centroid of the section which generates a nominal
Mx bending moment of 160kNm due to its self
weight (Gamma = 1.8 & DLA factor = 1.4). Check
that the Mx ULS capacity of the section exceeds
this. What is the angle of the neutral axis?

The precast beam is stitched to a continuous insitu

slab which forces the neutral axis to be horizontal.
What is the Mx ULS capacity now?

By keeping the neutral axis horizontal there is an

out of balance My moment which is resisted by a
transverse membrane force in the slab. What is the
value of this force if the beam is 10m long?

Save this section for use in other examples.

This column has a nominal concentric axial load of

1000kN together with a nominal My moment of
100kNm. What is the maximum additional nominal
Mx moment that can be applied at ULS. (Gamma =
1.8 & DLA factor = 1.4)

The design moments and forces at ULS are

Mx = 350kNm
Axial = 1320kN
Shear along y = 180kN
What links of 12mm diameter are required? At what
value of shear force will it be necessary to have
additional links?

3-23

Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU
Example 2_1.sam created in section 2.1 of this manual.

Section 1
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Section Title to Grillage Edge
Section with Reinforcement, the Sub-title to Example 3.4a and the Job
Number to 3.4a. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
3. Change the analysis type to Bending and Axial using the Data |Analysis
Type |Bending, Axial and Shear menu item.

Define Reinforcement
4. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form using the menu item Data |Define
Bars...

5. Click on the Generate drop down menu and select Reinforce Face(s) from the
list.
6. Click in the No. Of bars field and enter a value of 7.
7. Click in the Diameter field and enter a value of 24mm.
8. Click on the sloping bottom face of the section on the graphics window. The
face will be highlighted in black and the Reinforcement along face(s) form will
open.

3-24

9. Click in the No. of faces field and enter a value of 2 (the default cover of
50mm is assumed) then click OK.
10. Click on the Generate drop down menu and select 1 bar by 2 covers from the
list.
11. Click in the Diameter field and enter a value of 16mm.
12. Click on the left hand vertical and the top curved faces of the section on the
graphics window. Both faces will be highlighted in black and the Locate bar by
2 covers form will open.
13. Enter values of 50mm in both the Cover to face 1 and Cover to face 2 fields
then click OK.
14. Repeat 12 and 13 for the top right hand corner.
15. Click on OK to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.

Define Applied Forces

16. Open the Define loads form using the Data Define
Loads |Applied Forces... menu item.
17. Click on the Insert record button to add a load case.
Then click on the Insert record button below the
bottom table on the form.
18. On the first row of the table at the bottom of the form, click in the Type column
and select X Moment from the drop down list.
19. Enter a value of 160kNm in the Nominal Load column.
20. Enter a value of 1.8 in the Ultimate column.
21. Enter a value of 1.4 in the Ultimate DLA factor column.

3-25

22. Click on OK to close the Define loads form.

Calculate Capacity
23. Use the Calculate|Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
Click on the Loadcase drop down menu and select Loadcase: 1 from the list.
Ensure that Analysis type is set to Strength Ultimate Limit State.
24. Click on the Capacity drop down menu and select X Moment Positive from
the list.
25. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down menu and select Free from the list.
26. The limiting additional load is 15.4711kNm. The neutral angle axis is 36.1193.

27. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down menu and select Fixed horizontal
from the list.
28. The limiting additional load is now 321.414kNm.
29. The associated My moment is -591.27kNm but this bending will be restrained
by the membrane action in the adjoining slab. If the beam is 10m long and we
assume a uniformly distributed membrane force acting in the interface between
the edge beam and slab it will be 8* My/L2 = 47.3kN/m and will be
compressive.
30. Click on the OK button to close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
31. Use the File |Save As menu to open the Save File form.
32. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_4a.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.

Section 2
33. Use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU Example 2_3.sam created
in section 2.3 of this manual.
3-26

34. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the the Sub-title to Example 3.5b
and the Job Number to 3.5b. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
35. Change the analysis type to Bending, Axial and Shear using the Data
|Analysis Type | Bending, Axial and Shear menu item.

Define Applied Forces

36. Open the Define loads form using the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces...
menu item.
37. Click on the Insert record button to add a load case. Then click on the Insert
Record button near the bottom of the form.
38. On the first row of the table at the bottom of the form, click in the Type column
and select Axial from the drop down list. In the Nominal Load field and enter
a value of 1000kN (press Enter on the keyboard after inputting values).
39. Click on the Insert Record button near the bottom of the form again. On the
second row of the bottom table, click in the Type column and select Y
Moment from the dropdown list. Enter a value of 100kNm in the Nominal
Load column.
40. For all the rows in the table, enter values of 1 in the Serviceability column.
For all the rows in the table, enter values of 1.8 in the Ultimate column.
Ensure the default DLA factors are set to 1.4 for both Serviceability and
Ultimate.

41. Click on the OK button to close the Define Loads form.

42. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
A confirm form regarding the Capacity Reduction Factor will appear. Note the
message and click on the Yes button for this example.
3-27

43. Click on the Loadcase drop down menu and select Loadcase: 1 from the list.
44. Click on the Capacity drop down menu and select X Moment Positive from
the list.
45. The maximum additional Design Mx moment that can be applied is
136.409kNm. The max nominal moment is therefore 136.409/1.4/1.8 =
54.1kNm
46. Click on the OK button to close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
47. Open the Define loads form using the Data|Define Loads|Applied Forces
menu item.
48. Click on the Insert record button below the top table to add a load case and
decline to copy the active load case.
49. The ULS design moment (as opposed to nominal moments) are entered
directly into the top part of the table. In the second row, in the Mx column
(under the Ultimate group) enter 350. Enter 1320 in the Ax column and
enter 180 in the Vy column.

50. Click on OK to close the Define loads form.

51. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
52. Click on the Capacity drop down menu and select *Not used* from the list.
53. Tick the Shear Force Calcs check box.
54. Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer.
55. Scroll to the bottom of the Results Viewer to find the Fitment arrangement. The
links of 12mm diameter that are required are 646.27mm for 2 legs and
1292.54mm for 4 legs.
3-28

The output shows the maximum spacing is 200mm so we would use single
links at 200mm spacing.
56. The links defined above are minimum reinforcement requirements as the actual
shear v* (180kN) is less than the value of vu.min (292.09kN). This can be seen
on the Results Viewer. If the actual shear force exceeds this value then
additional links will be required. Irrespective of the level of shear
reinforcement, the applied ULS shear force (V*) must be below .Vu.max to
comply with the AS5100 limit on web shear crushing.

57. Click on the OK button to close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
58. Use the File|Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
59. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_4b and click on the Save button
to save the data file.
60. Close the program.

3-29

Summary
This example illustrates four techniques:
a. How to calculate section capacities of a non symmetrical section where
natural bending occurs about a principle axis.
b. How to restrain a section so that bending occurs about a given axis and
the resultant (out of balance) moments about a perpendicular axis can
be determined.
c. Consideration of biaxial bending combined with axial forces when
applying a given set of forces and moments to a section and being able
to calculate the allowable addition forces and moments.
d. How to design shear link requirements in a column.

3-30

3.5. Crack Width & Stress Calcs of an RC Section

Subjects Covered:
SLS Limiting stresses; Defining Load Effects; Crack width calculations according to
equations 24 and 26 of BD 44/95; Interpolation between long and short term modulus;
Maximum crack widths; Crack widths between specific bars.

Outline
The calculation of Serviceability limit state stresses and maximum crack widths are to
be calculated for the edge section, with reinforcement defined in section 3, under two
load/design situations.

Design situation 1
The precast beam is lifted at its ends through the centroid of the section which
generates a nominal Mx bending moments of 140kNm due to the dynamic
effect on its self weight (Ultimate Gamma = 1.8 and it is a live load). Check
that the concrete and steel stresses do not exceed the SLS limits

Check the crack widths for this design situation (not normally a requirement for
this design code and situation but shown for completeness)

Design situation 2
When the section is attached to the insitu slab the Neutral axis is forced to be
horizontal. The dead load nominal moment is 70kNm (Ultimate Gamma = 1.2)
and the live load moment is 80kNm (Ultimate Gamma = 1.8). What are the
concrete & reinforcement stresses for this case if an interpolated elastic
modulus is used?

What is the max crack width (Equ. 24) for this case.

What is the crack width (Equ. 24) between the two left most bars in the bottom
face.

3-31

Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU
Example 3_4a.sam created in section 3.4 of this manual.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Sub-title to Example 3.5 and
the Job Number to 3.5. Click on OK to close the Titles form.
3. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu to set the analysis type to Bending, Axial
and Shear.

Design Situation 1
Define Load Effects
4. Use the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces menu to open the Define loads
form.
5. Double-click in the Serviceability
to close the Define loads form.

field and enter a value of 1.0.

Click OK

Calculate Stresses
6. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
Set the Analysis type field to Service Limit State.
7. Click on the Loadcase drop down and select Loadcase: 1 from the list.
8. Click on the Capacity drop down and select Not used from the list.
9. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down menu and select Free from the list.
Note the error message stating that the section capacity has been exceeded
and click OK on the message. Click OK to close the Bending, Axial and
Shear form.
10. Use the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces menu to open the Define loads
form. Change the Nominal Load in the first row of the table at the bottom of the
form to a value of 140. Click OK to close the form.
11. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
Ensure that Loadcase is set to Loadcase: 1, Capacity is set to Not used,
Analysis type is set to Service Limit State and Neutral Axis angle is set to
Free.

3-32

12. Untick the Crack Width Calcs tick box (if it is already ticked) and then click on
the Results button. The tables of Maximum and Minimum Strains show the
concrete and steel stresses to be 18.35MPa and -213.8409MPa respectively.

Crack Width Checks

13. Tick the Crack Width Calcs tick box. Note and click OK on the warning
message. The crack widths are 0.277mm using equation 24 and 0.323mm
using equation 26 of the British code BD 44/95. Click OK to close the
Bending, Axial and Shear form.

Design Situation 2
14. Use the Data|Define Loads|Applied Forces menu to open the Define loads
form.
15. Click on the Insert record button at the top of the form to add a load case. A
Confirm form will open asking if you want to copy the active loadcase. Click on
No to create a new loadcase.
16. Click twice on the Insert record button below the bottom table of the form. In
the first row of the bottom table, click in the Type column and select X
Moment from the drop down list.
17. Enter a value of 70kNm in the Nominal Load column.
18. Enter a value of 1.0 in the Serviceability

column.

19. Click on the Perm/Live drop down and select Perm from the list. (Note that
the Ultimate

factor changes to 1.2 automatically).

20. On the second row of the bottom table, click in the Type column and select X
Moment from the drop down list.
21. Enter a value of 80kNm in the Nominal Load column.
3-33

22. Enter a value of 1.0 in the Serviceability

column.

column and 1.8 in the Ultimate

23. Leave the Perm/Live drop down set to Live.

24. Click on OK to close the Define Loads form.

Stress Checks
25. Use the Calculate| Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
26. Click on the Capacity drop down and select *Not used* from the list. Note and
click OK on any warning message that may appear.
27. Click on the Loadcase drop down and select Loadcase: 2 from the list.
28. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down and select Fixed horizontal from
the list.
29. Click on the Set Parameters for drop down and select Serviceability
Calculations from the list. This will open the Design Data for Serviceability
form.
30. Confirm that the Elastic modulus used field is set to Interpolated. Click OK
to close the form.
31. Untick the Crack Width Calcs tick box and click on the Results button to open
the Results Viewer.
32. The concrete and reinforcement stresses are shown in the MAXIMUM and
MINIMUM Strains table. The concrete stress is 8.53MPa and the
reinforcement stress is -128.73MPa. Close the Results Viewer using the green
Exit button.

3-34

Crack Width Checks

33. Go to the Bending, Axial and Shear form and tick the Crack Width Calcs tick
box. The crack widths calculated according to equations 24 and 26 of BD
44/95 are shown on the form. The maximum crack width according to equation
24 is 0.164mm.

34. It is also possible to find the crack width between specified bars. We want to
find out the crack width between the two outermost bars at the left hand side of
the beam. To do this draw a box around the two bars. The Results Viewer will
automatically open to show the crack width calculations for those bars. The
maximum crack width using equation 24 for those bars is 0.103mm.

3-35

35. Close the Results Viewer and click OK to close the Bending, Axial and Shear
form.
36. Use the File |Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
37. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_6.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.
38. Close the program.

Summary
The first design situation considers the lifting of the beam where it will bend about the
principle axis. The value of the bending moment is greater than just the dead load
bending moment to take into account the dynamic effects of the lifting.
The max concrete stresses can be obtained from the graphics, but the steel stresses
can only be obtained from the results output.
The second design situation illustrates the calculation of stresses and crack widths at
SLS when some of the load is long term permanent load and the rest is instantaneous
live load. The method used is an interpolation between the long and short term
modulus so the stresses calculated are those that would occur at the end of the
structure life. To check the stresses just after construction, the long term modulus
would need to be modified, so as to represent the correct amount of creep, or the user
can choose to use the short term modulus only.

3-36

3.6. General Stress Strain Analysis

Subjects Covered:
General stress strain materials;

Outline
For the Steel/Concrete composite beam, defined in section 2, it is required to
calculate the section capacity for bending (sagging and hogging) about the horizontal
axis and to examine the stress distribution due to an axial tensile load of -4000kN and
a sagging bending moment of 4000kNm.

This is done using the General Stress Strain analysis type, but, before this can be
carried out the material properties need to be defined as general stress strain type
material with specific strain limits.
The concrete has the same configuration and strain limits as AS5100 concrete.
The structural steel is defined as elastic-plastic with a stress limit set to 350MPa and a
strain limit of 0.01. The yield strain is set to give an elastic modulus of 200kN/mm2.
The reinforcement is set as an elastic-plastic with offset and the stress and strain
limits should be set as the same as AS5100 reinforcement but with a strain limit of
0.01.

3-37

Procedure
1. Open the program then open the data file AU Example 2_6 saved in section
2.6, using the File |Open menu item.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Section Title to General Stress
Strain Analysis, the Sub-title to Example 3.6 and the Job Number to 3.6.
Click on OK to close the Titles form.
3. Using the Data |Analysis Type menu item select General Stress / Strain.
Open the Define Material Properties form using the Data |Define Material
Properties menu item. Add an additional material property in the next
available row as a Defined Stress-Strain type. This should open the Defined
Property Details form.
4. Change the Factored Strength to 32 and choose Parabolic-Rectangular
from the dropdown in the Defined Stress-Strain Type field. This opens a
secondary form in which the Set Curve Default to: field can be set to other
codes of practice when carrying out work to different standards. Close this
secondary form and note that the Modulus of Elasticity-Short Term is
automatically set to 17.5218. Now change value of Modulus of Elasticity-Short
Term to 31.3213.
5. Set the Property Name to be Defined grade 32 Concrete before closing the
Define Property Details form with the OK button.

6. Add another material in the next available row as a Defined Stress-Strain

type. Set the Factored strength to 350MPa and the Defined Stress-Strain
Type to Elastic Plastic. Note the default strain at yield is +/- 0.00175 (giving
an elastic modulus of 200kN/mm2.) Click OK to accept these values and
close the secondary form. Ensure the Strain Limit is set to 0.01. Set the
Property Name to Defined Structural Steel before closing the Define Property
Details form with the OK button.

3-38

7. Add a third new material in the next available row as a Defined Stress-Strain
type. Set the Factored strength to 500MPa and the Defined Stress-Strain
Type to Elastic-Plastic with offset. For reinforcement to AS5100 the tensile
full yield stress is 500 at a strain of 0.0045. Enter this information in the Define
Stress-Strain Relation data sub form and then close this sub form using the
OK button. Note that when the sub form is closed the Factored Strength is still
set at 500MPa. Now set the Strain Limit to 0.01 and the Property Name to
Defined Reinforcement before closing the Define Property Details form. Click
OK on the Define Property Details form.

8. This has now completed the new material property definition so close the
Define Material Properties form with the OK button.
9. Open the Project Templates form using the menu item Options |Project
Templates Click on the Create new Project Template button.
This will display the New Project Template form, check the
Copied current model settings radio button and click on OK to
close the form.
10. Click in the Project Template field and type AU Version 6 Examples 3.7. Click
on the Export Template button to open the Export Project Template File
form. Change the filename to AU Version 6 Examples 3.6.spj and click on the
Save button to save the Project Template file. Click OK on the Project
Templates form.
11. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data |Define Section...
and set the parametric shape to have the Defined grade 32 Concrete property
3-39

and the Steel Sections to have the Defined-Structural Steel property. Close
this form with the OK button.

12. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form using the menu item Data |Define
Bars... and click on the Edit bars... button. Click in the graphics screen to
place a window around all the bars (they will turn red) and a secondary Edit
Reinforcement data form will be displayed. Change the Edit Option to Change
Property and set the Bar property to Defined-Reinforcement. Close both
forms with the OK buttons.
13. Change the Analysis type to General Stress/Strain using the Data |Analysis
Type menu item.
14. Open the Define Loads data form using the Data |Define Loads |Applied
Forces menu item. Click on Insert Record button at the top of the form to
create a new load case. Then enter 4000 and -4000 in the MX and AX
fields in the Ultimate sections of the top table. Close the Define Loads data
form using the OK button.

15. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu item to open the Bending, Axial and Shear
form. Set the Loadcase to Loadcase 1 and Capacity to *Not used*. The
maximum and minimum stresses can be obtained from the results viewer by
clicking on the Results button. Produce a print preview of the combined text
output and graphics by using the Print Preview menu item which can be found
under the More Buttons tab located immediately to the right of the Save as...
button on the Results Viewer form. Both the print Preview and results viewer
windows can be closed.

3-40

16. To obtain the sagging bending moment capacity set the Loadcase field to
None and the Capacity to X Moment Positive. The capacity will be shown
as the Limiting Additional Load on the Bending, Axial and Shear form

17. To obtain the hogging bending moment capacity set the Capacity field to X
Moment-Negative.
18. The hogging bending capacity is then the Limiting additional load.

3-41

19. Close all the data forms and save this data file as My AU Example 3_6.sam
using the File |Save As... menu item.
20. Close the program.

Summary
This example shows how any material with a known stress strain relationship can be
defined. These materials can then be assigned to components of a section and a
general strain compatibility analysis carried out to obtain limiting capacities or stresses
for a given set of loads.
In addition, it shows what happens if a section fails to converge in its iterative solution
and one of the procedures that may be used to resolve this problem.

3-42

3.7. Stresses at transfer of a prestress section

Subjects Covered:
Prestress Tendons; Relaxation loss; Elastic Loss; Interpolated/short term Modulus;
User Notes; Stress/Strain calculation Reports; Inverted Neutral Axis for Hogging.

Outline
The pre stressed section defined in Chapter 2 is opened and the slab and edge
section are removed from the section definition.
The section represents the mid span section of a 25m long beam which has been cast
and stressed and is about to be released from its mould. The concrete strength at
this stage is based on grade 32 concrete and the relaxation loss in the tendon force is
assumed to be 1.25%. The self weight moment is calculated based upon a weight
density of 23.54kN/m3 and applied in the load table.
An SLS stress analysis is carried out assuming that the neutral axis remains
horizontal, and the elastic modulus is set to the short term modulus.
The stress results are the stresses in the concrete taking into account the losses in
the tendons due to the elastic deformation of the concrete. By temporarily setting the
elastic modulus of the concrete to a very high value (say 10000kN/mm2) the resulting
stresses are those without elastic deformation losses.

3-43

Procedure
1. Start the program and use the menu item File |Open to open the file AU
Example 2_7.sam created in Chapter 2 of this manual. If an Information form
appears containing information about the project template, then click OK on
this form.
2. Use the menu item Data |Titles to change the Section Title to Prestressed
Section Analysis, the Sub-title to Example 3.7 and the Job Number to 3.7.
Click on OK to close the Titles form.
3. Open the Section Definition data form using the menu item Data |Define
Section... Delete the edge detail by clicking in the Library field of the fourth row
and using the delete key. Delete the slab section by clicking in the Library field
of the second row and using the delete key. Now delete the concrete infill by
clicking in the Library field of the second row and using the delete key.
4. Assign Grade 32 concrete to concrete beam component by using the drop
down selection of the Property field. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Section form.
5. To find the cross-sectional area of the beam, use the Data |Analysis Type
menu to set the analysis type to Section Properties. Use the Calculate
|Analyse menu to open the Calculate Section Properties form.

6. The cross-sectional area is 0.2175m2. The weight density is 23.54kN/m3 and

the length of the beam is 25m, therefore an Mx bending moment of 400kNm
(i.e 0.217523.5425x25/8) must be applied to the beam.
7. Click on the OK button to close the Calculate Section Properties form.
8. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu to set the analysis type to Bending, Axial
and Shear.

3-44

9. Delete the Structural Steel Material using the Define Material Properties form (if
it is still shown on the form).
10. Use the Data |Define Loads |Applied Forces menu to open the Define loads
form.
11. Click on the Insert record (+) buttons at the top and bottom of the form to add
a load case. On the first row of the bottom table, click in the Type column and
select X Moment from the drop down list. Enter a value of 400kNm in the
Nominal Load column. Set the Perm/Live field to Perm. Change the

serviceability and DLA factors to 1 by clicking in relevant fields and entering a

value of 1.0.

12. Click on the OK button to close the Define Loads form.

13. The relaxation loss in the tendon force must be accounted for before analysing.
Open the Define Bars and Tendons form using the menu item Data | Define
Bars...
14. The tendon forces are 188kN and will be reduced by 1.25% in this example.
Click on the Edit Tendons button. Window around the whole section in the
graphics window to select all of the tendons. This will open the Edit
Reinforcement sub form. On the sub form set the Edit Option field to Change
force and enter a value of 186kN in the Tendon Force field. Click OK on the
sub form.
15. Click on the OK button to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.
16. It is useful to make a note of this in the User Notes form which can be opened
up using the menu item Data | Notes... Enter the following text Tendon forces
have been reduced from 188kN to 186kN to represent relaxation losses at
transfer. Then close the form with the OK button.

3-45

17. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
Click No on a form that may appear regarding iterations. Ensure that the
Analysis type field is set to Service Limit State.
18. Click on the Neutral Axis angle drop down and select Set angle to from the
list. Click in the corresponding edit box and enter a value of 180.
19. By default the elastic modulus used in the calculations will be interpolated
between the long and short term values and as the load is totally Permanent
the modulus will be equal to the long term value. To force the short term value
to be used we use the Set Parameter for: field to Serviceability Calculations
and in the displayed sub-form set Elastic Modulus used: to Short Term. Close
the sub-form with the OK button.

20. The results are shown on the graphic display as:

21. Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer.

3-46

22. The maximum stress in the tendons is -1192.939MPa. The minimum stress is
-1255.188MPa.
The full stress in the tendon should be the tendon force divided by the tendon
area = 186000/143 = 1300.7MPa. The difference in these values is due to
elastic deformation losses.
23. Click on the OK button to close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
24. Use the Data |Define Material Properties menu to open the Define Material
Properties form. Open the data form for the Grade 32 concrete by clicking on
the Name field in the first row of the table. On the Define Property Details form,
click in the Elastic Modulus Short Term field and enter a value of
10000kN/mm2. The program will display a warning message saying Outside
expected range. Click on the OK button.
25. Click on OK on both the Define Property Details and the Define Material
Properties forms to close both forms and save the changes.

26. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu to open the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
A warning message about the stress increment calculations appears because
the decompression calculations have not been completed, but this is only a test
case. A second message appears stating that the section capacity has been
exceeded. Take note of these messages and click OK on them both. Click on
the Results button to display the Results Viewer.
27. The maximum and minimum stresses without elastic deformation losses are
now -1300.318MPa and -1300.565MPa respectively.
3-47

28. Close the Results Viewer and click on the OK button to close the Bending,
Axial and Shear form.
29. Change the material back to the original grade 32 concrete by opening the
Define Material Properties form, clicking on the Default button and clicking
Yes on the Confirm form that appears. Input a value of 32 in the
Characteristic Strength field and press Return on the keyboard. Close both
material forms with the OK button.
30. Use the File|Save As... menu to open the Save File form.
31. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_7.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.
32. Close the program.

Summary
This example demonstrates the effect of including prestress tendons in a section.
The resultant stresses are due to the prestress force and the moments from the dead
weight of the beam. If it was required to see the stresses from the prestress only,
then a very small dead load could be applied.
It should be noted that although relaxation losses are included in the material form for
pre-stressing tendons, this data is not used as the section analysis is not fixed to a
given time. This is why the tendon forces were modified manually to set the
relaxation loss to 1.25%.
The stress diagrams are always produced with compressive forces at the top. If a
hogging moment is applied to a section it automatically inverts the section. In the
prestress case the applied moment is sagging but the prestress provides higher
compressive stress at the bottom of the beam. This is why the neutral axis needed to
be inverted manually.

3-48

3.8. Interaction Curves for Columns

Subjects Covered:
Reinforced concrete column; General Stress/Strain Sections; Effective lengths;
slenderness moments

Outline
Using two sections defined in Chapter 2 of this manual, shown below, produce
bending/axial interaction curves for each, using 50 points on each curve, as follows:

Using AS5100 ULS calculation determine the

design MY bending capacity of the section.

Create Interaction curves for the section

assuming an effective length of 0.0 in both
directions. This assumes the section is a
beam and that no slenderness or tolerance
moments will be considered.

The curves should be for MX (hor) against

AXIAL (vert) for values of MY ranging from
0.0 to just below MY capacity in increments of
50kNm.

Examine the effect on the interaction

diagrams when an effective length of 3.0m is
used.

Using General stress strain calculations and

materials determine the ultimate axial
capacity of the section.

Create an interaction curve of MX (hor)

against MY (vert) for axial ranging from 0.0 to
capacity so that there are 10 curves.

Example 2.3
with 12mm dia. bars

Example 2.5

3-49

Procedure
RC Column
1. Start the program and use the File |Open menu item to open the file AU
Example 2_3.sam created in Chapter 2 of this manual. If an Information form
appears containing information about the project template, then click OK on
this form.
2. Use the Data |Titles menu item to change the Section Title to Interaction
Curves for RC Column, the Sub-title to Example 3.8a and the Job Number to
3.8a. Click on the OK button to close the Titles form.
3. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form using the menu item Data|Define
Bars. Click on the Edit Bars button then box around all of the bars. On the Edit
Reinforcement sub-form select Change bar diameter in the Edit Option field
and input a value of 12 in the Bar diameter field. Click OK on both forms to
save the changes.
4. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu item to set the analysis type to Bending,
Axial and Shear.
5. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu item to open the Bending, Axial and Shear
form. Ensure that the Analysis type field is set to Strength Ultimate Limit
State. Click on the Capacity drop down menu and select Y Moment
Positive from the list.

6. The design MY bending capacity of the section is 99.7186kNm.

7. Click the OK button to close the Bending, Axial and Shear form.
8. Use the menu item Calculate |Interaction Curves to open the Interaction
Curves form.

3-50

9. Click on the Required Curves y-axis drop down menu and select Axial from
the list. Click on the Required Curves x-axis drop down menu and select Mx
from the list.

10. On the Tab Increments panel, click on the From field and enter a value of
0kNm. Click on the To field and enter a value of 75kNm. Click on the
Increment field and enter a value of 5kNm.
11. Click on the Add Tab by Increments button.
12. Click on the Points per Curve field and enter a value of 50.
13. Click on the My=0 tab of the Interaction Curves form. Click on the Analyse
All button.

14. Click on the Results button to display the Results Viewer.

15. Click on the tab My = 70 on the Interaction Curves form and then the My =
75 tab and examine the graphics displayed.

3-51

We can see that the bottom part of the curve for both My =70 and My = 75 are
unusually shaped . Sometimes this indicates that the results in these regions
of the curves are not correct and are not useable. This is because that when
My tends towards its capacity the solution becomes unstable at a number of
points, especially at small values of Mx. To examine where points on the
curves may be unstable we can inspect the results file and determine which
part of the curve is usable.

If we scroll to the bottom of the results file we can see that in the case of this
particular example there are no interpolated points. In those files where a user
does encounter interpolated points, then such points indicate that a solution
has failed to converge at that point. Such areas would be unreliable and
should not be used.
The procedure for a case where a solution has failed to converge for small
values of Mx and high values of My would be to consider a change in the axes
and plot My against Axial for a range of small Mx values. Such a procedure is
demonstrated in the following steps. Close the Results Viewer.
16. Change the x axis to My ( all the My tabs should disappear) and then create
tabs for Mx = 0 to 20 in increments of 1. (See steps 9 and 10).
17. Click on the Analyse All button to produce the curves. We can see from the
graphics that this has then produced more stable results in this region of the
3D interaction.

3-52

18. Click in the Mx = 0 tab and note the Critical value of Y on the Interaction Curve
form when X = 0. The value should be 3516.97kN.

19. Close the Results Viewer and click the OK button to close the Interaction
Curves form.
20. Use the File |Save As... menu item to open the Save File form.
21. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_10a.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.

Encased Column
22. Use the File |Open menu item to open the file AU Example 2_5.sam created
in Chapter 2 of this manual.
23. Use the Data |Titles menu item to change the Section Title to Interaction
Curves for Encased Column, the Sub-title to Example 3.10b and the Job
Number to 3.10b. Click on the OK button to close the Titles form.
24. Use the Data |Analysis Type menu item to set the analysis type to General
Stress/Strain.
25. Use the Options| Project Templates menu item to open the Project
Templates form. Click on the Import Template button and open the file
Version 6 Examples 3.7.spj created in section 3.7 of this guide. Click the
Yes button on any Confirm forms that appear. Click on the OK button to
close the Project Templates form.
26. Use the Data |Define Material Properties menu item to open the Define
Material Properties form. Click on the Apply Template button. The Project
Template Materials form will appear, click on the Replace current ones radio
button and then click the OK button to close the form. Click on the OK
button to close the Define Material Properties form.
3-53

27. Use the Data |Define Section menu item to open the Define Section form.
28. Click in the Property field on the first row of the table and select Defined grade
32 Concrete from the drop down menu.
29. Click in the Property field on the second row of the table and select Defined
Structural Steel from the drop down menu.
The third row is the void section to make the hole in the concrete to take the
steel.
30. Click on the OK button to close the Define Section form.
31. In order for the program to perform the calculations, some nominal reinforcing
bars must be included in the section. Use the Data |Define Bars menu item
to open the Define Bars and Tendons form.
32. Click on the Generate drop down menu and select Draw Bars from the list.
Click in the Diameter field and enter a value of 1mm. A warning message
appears saying this is a non standard size. Click on OK to close this.
33. On the Define Bars and Tendons graphic display, click on the 4 grid points
nearest the edge of the concrete section that lie on the X or Y axis as shown
below.

3-54

34. Click on the OK button to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.
35. Use the Calculate |Analyse menu item to open the General Stress Strain
form. Ensure that the Analysis type is set to General Stress/Strain. Click on
the Capacity drop down menu and select Axial from the list.

36. The ultimate axial capacity of the section is 13378.9kN.

37. Click the OK button to close the Calculate General Stress/Strain form.
38. Use the menu item Calculate |Interaction Curves to open the Interaction
Curves form.
39. Click on the Required Curves y-axis drop down menu and select My from the
list. Click on the Required Curves x-axis drop down menu and select Mx from
the list.
40. On the Tab Increments panel, click on the From field and enter a value of
0kNm. Click on the To field and enter a value of 10000kNm. Click on the
Increment field and enter a value of 1000kNm. Click on the Add Tab by
Increments button.
3-55

41. Click on the Points per Curve field and enter a value of 50.
42. Click on the Analyse All button to produce the curves. Note and click OK on
any warning messages that may appear.
43. Click on the OK button to close the Interaction Curves form.
44. Use the File |Save As... menu item to open the Save File form.
45. Change the filename to My AU Example 3_8b.sam and click on the Save
button to save the data file.
46. Close the program.

Summary
This example shows how multiple interaction curves can be created in one analysis
and that the interaction variables can be changed.
It also highlights that you need to be careful when interpreting the results, as failure to
converge at some points may occur.
It was demonstrated that when the tabbed value approached the section capacity for
that component alone then the solution for the other two components becomes
unstable. In this case it is better to change the tabbed component to a different
component and investigate the interaction between the others.
The second example shows that by using general stress strain methods, interaction
curves can be drawn for any section, not just RC sections.

3-56

4. Beam Definition
Contents
4.1.
4.2.

Prestress Beam Definition (Simple) ........................................................................... 4-3

Prestress Beam Definition (Advanced) ...................................................................... 4-7

4-1

4-2

4.1. Prestress Beam Definition (Simple)

Subjects Covered:
Prestress beam; Define material properties; Define beam; Define Span; Define
prestress beam section; Analysis for Transfer Stresses

Outline
The section of a 22m long prestressed concrete Super-T beam and insitu concrete
slab is shown below.

The prestressed beam is a standard Super-T girder (1200mm Deep Type T3-2 in
accordance with AS5100.5 Appendix B). The girder is cast using Grade 50 MPa
concrete which a concrete strength at transfer of prestress of 40 MPa. The 200mm
thick insitu slab is 2m wide and constructed using grade 40 concrete. Standard
15.2mm pre-stressing strands are used; each having an effective area of 143mm2.
The tensile strength, fp of each tendon is 1750MPa and they are initially stressed at
75% with a full relaxation of 7% (of which occurs at transfer). Tendons are initially
located in all default manufacturers locations as shown above. Save the file as My
AU Example 4_3.sam.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options |Projects Templates menu
item.
2. Begin a new beam using the menu item File |New Beam.
3. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the title as Prestress Beam - Simple
with a sub-title of Example 4.1. Also set the Job Number to 4.1 and add

4-3

your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the Titles
form.
4. Use the menu item Data |Beam Type to set the beam type as Pre-tensioned
Prestressed.

Modify Materials Loaded from the Template

5. Next we will change the material properties loaded from the template.
Click on the Data |Define Material Properties... menu to open the Define
Material Properties form. Double-click in the Name column on row 5 (Structural
Steel material) then press the Delete key on your keyboard to delete the
redundant material property.
Click in the Name column on row 1 to open the concrete material properties.
Change the Characteristic strength, fc to 50MPa. Click OK to close the
Define Property Details form. Click in the Name column on row 2 to open the
other concrete material properties. Ensure that the Characteristic strength, fc is
set to 40MPa. Click OK to close the Define Property Details form.
Click in the Name column on row 4 to open the prestress material properties.
Ensure that the Tensile strength, fp is set to 1750MPa, the Initial Prestress
Force to 75%. Change Maximum Relaxation After 1000 Hours to 7% and
the Relaxation at Transfer to 50% (note: this is 50% of the total relaxation
loss).

Click OK on both forms to save the new material properties.

6. The next step is to define the geometry of the beam.
Click on the Data|Define Beam... menu item to open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Definition form. In the Beam length field, enter a value of 22m. Make sure
Cross section is is set to Uniform and Location is is set to Interior beam.

Suggest Section Size

7. Next we will briefly look at how we can get the program to suggest a sizing for
the beam cross section.

4-4

Click on the Suggest size of drop down and select Super T-Girder from the
list of options. This will open the Pre-tensioned Beam Initial Sizing form.

The form shows that a 1000mm Deep Super-T Type T2-2 T2 Girder may be a
suitable initial size for this beam. However, this beam type is not going to be
used in this particular example, so click Cancel to close the sub-form without
selecting the beam.

Define Beam & Slab

8. Click on the Define drop down and select Section from the list of options.
This will open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form. Click on the
Component column in the first row of the table and select PC Beam Standard. This will open the Define Precast Beam Component form.
Click on the Concrete beam range drop down and select Super-T Girder from
the list of options. Click on the Shape no. within range drop down and select
T3-2 Open Top (this is the 1200m Deep girder to AS5100.5 Appendix B
shape definition) from the list of options. Click OK to close the sub-form.
The default beam has a 2100mm wide top flange. To reduce this to 2000mm
wide for this example, from the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form
click on the Component column in the first row of the table and select PC
Beam - define. This will open the Define PC Beam form. Edit the flange
dimensions to suite a 2000mm wide flange. Click OK to close the sub-form.
9. The next step is to define the slab.
Click on the Component column in the second row of the table and select In
situ regular. This will open the Define Precast Beam Component form. The
Shape Reference will be set to Rectangle already so enter 2000mm in the
width field and 200mm in the depth field then click OK.

4-5

Ensure that the Y offset for the slab is set to 1200, putting the slab in the
correct location.

Check that the Transfer Property for the beam and the Final Property for the
slab are both set to grade 40 and the Final Property for the beam is set to
grade 50, then click on the OK button to close the Pre-tensioned Beam
Section Definition form. Click on OK to close the Pre-tensioned Beam
Definition form.
10. Finally we will save the beam file.
Click on the File |Save as... menu item and save the file as My AU Example
4_1.sam.
11. Close the program.

Summary
This example shows how to enter a simple pretensioned prestressed beam into
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014. A default Super-T shape is defined and the
method of editing the default shape is described. The construction stages are defined,
being the precast beam and a single stage composite deck construction. The
properties of the concrete at each stage of construction are defined using the program
defaults. Tendon definition is also produced in the program default locations.

4-6

4.2. Prestress Beam Definition (Advanced)

Subjects Covered:
Prestress beam; Edge beam; Exterior beam; Varying cross section; Merge by stage;
Edge upstand; Section locations; Remove unwanted tendons; Debond tendons;
Define reinforcement; Curtail of reinforcement

Outline
A prestressed concrete Super-T
beam and insitu concrete slab,
and kerb upstand are shown
adjacent and below. The girder
is a 1200mm deep standard
shape beam with just 4 tendons
in the top of the beam and four
rows of tendons in the bottom.
The positions of the tendons
are in the manufacturers default
locations and six tendons on
the second row are debonded
along the first 5m from the
beam ends.

The precast beam is 22m long and

has solid end blocks at 1.5m from
each end. It is constructed using
Grade 50 concrete and prestressed
with standard 7 wire strands, each
having an effective area of 143mm2
and a nominal radius of 15.2 mm.
The tensile strength, fp of each
tendon is 1750MPa and they are
initially stressed at 75% with a full
relaxation of 7% (of which occurs
at transfer). The concrete strength at
transfer is 35 MPa.

4-7

The slab is cast in two stages: the first (Stage 1a) being the central 10m portion and
the second (stage 1b) being the two end slabs being 6m from each end (this staging
reduces the mid span stresses as composite action is achieved prior to casting the
end slabs). The kerb upstand (stage 2) is then added as an additional stage and is
cast along the complete length. All insitu concrete is grade 40.

Reinforcement is placed in the

composite slab (N16-200 Top
and Bottom). The top layer of
slab reinforcement is curtailed
such that it extends 7.0m into the
slab
form
both
ends.
Reinforcement is also in the side
faces of the webs (5/N16) as
indicated. Standard Grade 500
reinforcement is used.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options |Projects Templates menu
item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File |New Beam.

Define Materials and Beam

3. Open the Define Material Properties form using Data |Define Material
Properties... from the menu. Delete any redundant material by clicking on the
material and then using the Delete Key on the keyboard. Click in the Name
column on row 1 to open the concrete material properties. Change the
Characteristic strength, fc to 50MPa. Click OK to close the Define Property
Details form. Click in the Name column on row 2 to open the other concrete
material properties. Ensure that the Characteristic strength, fc is set to
40MPa. Click OK to close the Define Property Details form. Create a third
concrete material in row 5 with Characteristic strength, fc set to 35MPa.
Ensure that the Tensile Strength, fp of the Prestress Strand material is 1750
MPa, with the intitial prestress 75% of fp. Change the Maximum Relaxation to
7% and Relaxation at Transfer to 50%. Close the Define Material Properties
form using the OK button.

4-8

4. Select the menu item Data |Titles... to set the Beam Title as Prestress Beam Advanced with a sub-title of Example 4.2. Also set the Job Number to 4.2
and add your initials to the Calculated by data item. Click on OK to close the
titles form.
5. Open the Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form using the Data |Define Beam
Menu item. Set the Beam Length to 22 and the Support to beam end face to
0.4 at both ends and press Enter on the keyboard. Note the Support c/c is
shown as 21.2m.

6. In the Cross section is: field select varying. The No. of different sections: field
should be set to 3.
The first section is that at the centre of the beam with a precast beam and
stage 1a insitu concrete representing the slab. The second section is that
section where there is no infill but the slab is stage 1b. The third section is the
same as section 2 but there is no void in the concrete beam section. The
upstand (Stage 2 concrete) is present in all three sections.

Define Cross Sections and Locations

7. To create section 1, open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form by
selecting Section 1 from the drop down list in the Define: field. In the
Component column of the first row of the table, select PC beam standard to
open the Define Precast Beam Component form. Here set the Concrete beam
range: to Super-T Girder and the Shape no. within range: to T3-2 Open Top
4-9

and then close the form using the OK button. Ensure that the Transfer
Property is set to grade 35 material and ensure the Final Property is grade 50
concrete.
8. In the Component column of the second row of the table select Insitu
regular. In the Define Precast Beam Component form set the Shape
reference to Rectangle, the width to 2000 and the depth to 200; then close
the form with the OK button. Stage should be set to Stage 1A and the x & y
offsets to 0 and 1200 respectively.
9. The precast beam by default has a 2100mm wide top flange. To adjust this
width back to 2000mm, in the Component column of the first row of the table,
reselect PC beam standard and change the selector to "PC beam - define".
This opens the Define PC Beam form for editing the default joint coordinates.
Select the coordinates for the edges of the top flange and adjust to provide an
overall flange width of 2000mm; then close the form with the OK button.
10. The last component to add is the upstand which is done by adding an
additional defined shape. In the Component column of the third row of the
table select Insitu define. Create a shape by clicking the small + button at
the bottom of the table 5 times and then editing the coordinates to (-1000,1400)
(-750,1400) (-750,1550) (-1000,1550) (-1000,1400), and naming the shape
Kerb; then close the form with the OK button.

All component stages for Section 1 are now defined. Check that the transfer
and final properties for each component are correct (see below). Close the Pretensioned Beam Section Definition form with the OK button.

4-10

11. To edit section 2 select Section 2 from the drop down list in the Define: field.
By default this will be the same as Section 1. All we need to do is change the
Stage for the Slab component to Stage1B and change the Name: to
Stage1B. Close the Section Definition form with the OK button. Decline to
update the other sections if asked if you want to do so.
12. To create section 3 (which is the solid infill section at the ends of the beam)
select Section 3 from the drop down list in the Define: field. By default this
will be the same as Section 1. To define the solid end block of the PC beam,
reselect from the first row of the Pretensioned Beam Section Definition form,
and reselect the selector to "PC beam - define". This opens the Define PC
Beam form for editing the default joint coordinates. Select the coordinates
around the perimeter of the internal void and delete them using the delete
button on the keyboard until the beam is of solid shape. Close the form with the
OK button and decline to update the other sections. Set the Stage in the
second row to Stage 1B and close the form with the OK button.

13. The sections now need to be located at positions along the span. This is done
by selecting Section Locations in the Define: field and filling out the data as
shown below in the resulting data form. Please note that the first column
values are selected from a drop down; entering the second column values will
automatically fill the third column values; the last row is hidden in the scrollable
table but should be Section 3 and 22. Click OK to close the Beam Feature
Definition form.

4-11

Define Tendons
14. To define pre-stressing tendons open the Pre-tensioned Beam Tendon
Definition form by selecting Tendons in the Define: field of the Pre-tensioned
Beam Definition form.
15. By default all available tendon locations have a fully stressed tendon applied.
To remove the tendons not required (but not the locations) set the Edit
tendons: field to Insert/Remove and then select the unwanted tendons in the
graphics window by boxing around the group as shown this will turn them
red. The tendons will be deleted when the delete key on the keyboard is
pressed. The tendons can be replaced by doing the same but using the
Insert key rather than Delete.

16. Six tendons on the second row are to be debonded which is done by selecting
Debond in the Edit tendons: field. Tick the Symmetrical Elevation box, set the
Dimension/Left: field to 5.0 (when the enter key is pressed it automatically
updates the right end) and then select with the mouse (or window around) the
tendons shown below, which turns them red. The tendons are debonded
beyond these locations when the Insert key on the keyboard is pressed and
are indicated graphically as orange rather than green circles.
4-12

17. To see how the tendons and sections change along the beam length click once
on the green arrow in the elevation graphics and drag the pointer from one end
to the other. The section graphics changes accordingly. Close the Tendon
Definition form using the OK button.

Define Reinforcement
18. To define the reinforcement, select Reinforcement in the Define: field of the
Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form which opens the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Reinforcement form. To create the bar positions click on the + button
near the bottom of the form which opens the Define Reinforcement form.
Reinforcement is required in the top layer of the slab at both ends of the beam
with a gap in the middle. This is achieved by defining two bars, one for each
end of the beam, and setting the start and end points of each accordingly. The
two bars can be located in the same position in the section. The bars will be
created initially with the bars at one end below the bars at the other end so that
we can window round the group. Once the curtailments have been set we can
easily translate the bar positions to the correct positions. An uninterrupted
layer of reinforcement will also be defined in the bottom layer of the slab.

4-13

19. Set the Diameter: field to 16mm, the

Position by: field to Equal Spacing < value
and the Spacing: field to 200mm. Select
Reinforce face(s) in the Generate: field
and then click on the top face of the slab
which will open a secondary form. Accept
the default value of 50mm cover by closing
this form with the OK button and the bars
will then be displayed in the graphics
window. Click on the bottom face above the
void. Accept the default value of 50mm
cover by closing this form with the OK
button. We will create a third layer of
reinforcement by clicking on the bottom face
above the void again, this time setting a
value of 100mm cover and closing the
form with the OK button.

20. By default the reinforcement runs from one end of

the beam to the other, so each layer needs
curtailing. This is done by first closing the Define
Reinforcement form using the OK button.
Window round the top layer of reinforcement in
the graphics window and click on the Edit
Reinforcement Attributes button. This will display
the Edit Reinforcement Attributes form in which
the End: Dimension should be set to 7 before
closing the form with the OK button. This is
repeated for the middle layer of reinforcement
except the Start: Dimension is set to 15. Note
that you will have to tick the Modify box in order
to be able to set the Start and End Dimensions.

21. The middle layer of reinforcement now

needs moving to have 50mm cover. We will
use an alternative method. Click on the
green arrow in the graphics window and
drag it to the bars at the right hand end of
the beam. Click on the + button again, but
instead of defining additional bars we will
click on the Edit bars button. Window round
the middle layer of reinforcement and an Edit
Reinforcement form will be displayed. Set
the Edit Option: field to X_Y translation
then set the x: value to 0 and the y: value
to 34 before closing the form with the OK button.
4-14

22. To define the 5/N16 bars in the web we will use a different method for bar
positioning.
Firstly, set the Generate field to Draw bars,
Diameter: field to 16mm, the Position by:
field to Number and the No. bars: field to
"1". Generate two bars with the mouse by
selecting grid positions one at the top of the
web and one at the bottom. Once these bars
are generated, edit their coordinates: Top
Bar (-456, 1033), Bottom Bar (-380, 236).
Repeat for the other web, this time with the
two generated bars edited to have the
following coordinates: Top Bar (456, 1033)
Bottom Bar (380, 236). Now set the No. of
bars: field to "5". In the graphic screen, change the top Snap: selector to
"Bar/Tendon". Generate five bars with the mouse by selecting the top and
bottom bars (first web) in the graphic. Repeat for the second web.
23. All of the forms can now be closed in sequence with the OK button to
complete the reinforcement definition. When closing the forms a warning
message will appear stating "Superimposed Bars Have Been Deleted". Select
"OK" to remove the duplicated top and bottom bars in the web and close the
forms.
24. To see graphically how the reinforcement varies along the beam span, open
the Beam Reinforcement or Tendon Definition form then click on the green
arrow in the elevation graphics and move it along the beam to display the
reinforcement and tendons. (It is worth noting that the small blue handles that
can be seen at the soffit of the beam when the Tendon Definition form is open
can be used to alter the curtailment positions of the tendons).

Clicking on the
icon shows an isometric view in which a three dimensional
representation of the reinforcement can be seen. Parameters for this view can
be controlled on the orange General tab at the side of the graphics window.

4-15

25. Close all forms using the OK button and then save the file using the File
|Save as... menu item as My AU Example 4_2.sam.
26. Close the program.

Summary
In this example we have defined a pretensioned prestressed beam with supports
offset from the beam ends, and three different cross sections. The construction
staging including casting of the composite slab in two stages, and an additional stage
of a composite kerb upstand is defined. The variance in the beam section along its
length allowing for the solid end blocks is also defined. We have also defined tendons
along the length of the beam and debonded them at various positions. Finally we
looked at techniques for defining and curtailing reinforcement in both the top slab and
the webs.

4-16

5. Beam Design
Contents
5.1.

Prestressed Beam Design ......................................................................................... 5-3

5-1

5-2

5.1. Prestressed Beam Design

Subjects Covered:
Prestressed beam design; Erection loads; Generate beam loads; Beam dead load;
Temporary support loads; Apply negative loads to beams; Temporary construction
loads; Beam span increments; Constructions loads; Remove loads; Superimposed
dead loads; Import live loads; Absolute shears; AS 5100 temperature profiles; Tendon
layout optimisation; Shear resistance; Shear fitment requirements; Add points of
interest; Transverse reinforcement requirements.

Outline
A composite pre-tensioned pre-cast beam and concrete slab is shown below. The
beam is an internal beam of a simply supported bridge deck of 22m span and the 2m
wide concrete slab is cast in one. The dimensions of the beam can be found in
example 4.1.

The bending and shear effects due to dead load and superimposed dead load
(2.5kN/m) are created by using the Generate feature in the program. During
construction the beam is initially supported on temporary supports at 1m from the
beam ends. There is also a temporary construction load of 1.0kN/m over the length of
the beam. This load and the temporary supports are removed once the concrete has
hardened.
Max live load bending (with associated shears) and shear effects (with associated
moments) have been prepared in an external ASCII file as envelopes.
There are no secondary effects due to differential temperature and shrinkage, as the
beam is statically determinate, but the primary stresses need to be included for both,
where appropriate. The temperature profile to be applied to the section is in
5-3

accordance with AS 5100.2, for Region 1. The shrinkage strain for the concrete is to
be set to -0.00025 with 20% of this occurring before the insitu slab is cast. The
differential shrinkage strain should be -0.0001 and residual creep factor set to 1.5.
Use the default creep strain calculated by the program and assume 25% of this strain
occurs before the insitu slab is cast.
It is required to design the required tendon layout with appropriate debonding so that
SLS and ULS design criteria for bending moments and stresses are met during
transfer, beam erection and during normal use. Shear fitment spacing in the beam
also needs to be determined to resist both transverse and longitudinal shear forces.
The reinforcement grade for the shear fitments is the same as that for the main
reinforcement and the vertical shear is resisted by the precast beam only. For
longitudinal shear it can be assumed that the interface surface is a "trowelled"
surface. All design is to AS 5100.

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file AU Example 4_1.sam created in
section 4.
2. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Prestressed Concrete
Beam with a sub-title of Example 5.1. Also add your initials to the Calculated
by data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.

Define Erection Loads

3. Next we will define erection of beam loads using Generate to include two
extra components; one for the temporary 1kN/m and the other for the support
loads (upwards).
Use the menu item Data|Define Loading... to open the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form. Click on the Loading Description drop down and select
Erection of beam from the list of design load cases then click on the
Generate button. Click on Yes on the confirmation form that appears. The
Generate Beam Loads form will now open.
The program automatically calculates the dead load for the beam and adds it
as the first component of the generated load, called Beam dead load.

5-4

This load needs to be applied equally to the two temporary support locations.
The UDL intensity is 11.87kN/m which applies a total load of 261.1kN to the
beam. To apply this as a point load to a beam, use two 100mm long UDLs.
The equivalent applied UDL intensity over a 100mm length is 1305.7kN/m.
Click on the Add Load Component button and enter the UDL Intensity Start
and End as 1305.7kN/m. Set Start Dimension to 0.95m and the End
Dimension to 1.05m. Change the ULS and SLS Load Factors to -1.2 and
-1.0 respectively to make this an upward load and set the Component Ref. to
Left Temp Support.

Click on the Add Load Component button and repeat the process
(remembering to make ULS and SLS Load Factors negative), this time setting
the Start Dimension to 20.95m, the End Dimension to 21.05m and the
Component Ref. to Right Temp Support.

Finally we need to define the temporary construction load. Click on the Add
Load Component button again and enter the UDL Intensity Start and End as
1kN/m. Leave all the other fields at their default values and set the
Component Ref. to Temp Construction.

5-5

In the Increments section, set Beam span equally divided by to 50 then click
OK to close the Generate Beam Loads form. The Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form will now show the total load applied by the four load
components.

Define Construction Stage 1 Loads

4. The next step is to define the loads for construction stage 1A (composite deck
slab self weight). Click on the Loading Description drop down on the Define
Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form and select Construction Stage 1A from the
list of design load cases then click on the Generate button. Click on Yes on
the confirmation form if it appears. The Generate Beam Loads form will now
open. The program automatically calculates the UDL intensity for the
construction loads. Click OK to close the form.

Remove Temporary Loads and Supports

5. Next we will define a load case to remove the effects of the temporary loads
and supports.
Click on the Loading Description drop down on the Define Pre-tensioned Beam
Loads form and select SDL non-structural concrete etc from the list of design
load cases then click on the Generate button. Click on Yes on the
confirmation form that appears. The Generate Beam Loads form will now open.
Set the UDL Intensity Start and End as 1305.7kN/m. Set Start Dimension to
0.95m and the End Dimension to 1.05m. Change the ULS and SLS Load
5-6

Factors to 1.2 and 1 respectively and set the Component Ref. to Rm Left
Temp Sup.
Click on the Add Load Component button and repeat the process, this time
setting the Start Dimension to 20.95m, the End Dimension to 21.05m and
the Component Ref. to Rm Right Temp Sup.
Finally we need to remove the temporary construction load. Click on the Add
Load Component button again and enter the UDL Intensity Start and End as
1kN/m. Change the ULS and SLS Load Factors to -1.2 and -1 respectively
and set the Component Ref. to Rm Temp Const.
In the Increments section, set Beam span equally divided by to 50 then click
OK to close the Generate Beam Loads form. The Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form will now show the total load applied by the three load
components.

Define Surfacing and Live Loads

6. The next step is to define the SDL surfacing loads.
Click on the Loading Description drop down on the Define Pre-tensioned Beam
Loads form and select Superimposed dead load from the list of design load
cases then click on the Generate button. Click on Yes on the confirmation
form if it appears. The Generate Beam Loads form will now open.
Set the UDL Intensity Start and End as 2.5kN/m then click OK.
7. Next we will import some results from a separate live load analysis.
Click on the Interface button, select Direct ASCCI File Import and click OK.
Select the supplied file AU Live Loads.sld and click Open. This will import
loads into the Live load BM and Live load SF + associated BM design load
cases.
Click OK to close the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form. The program
will display the following confirmation dialog:

5-7

When you export enveloped live load results from the analysis module, it
exports the absolute values of shear, i.e. all negative shears are converted to
positive values. The dead load shears created using the Generate option in
this example are actual shears. This means the program cant add the dead
and live load shears together. By answering yes on this form, you force the
program to convert the dead load shears into absolute values so they can be
combined with the live loads.
Click on Yes to close the dialog.

Enter Temperature Profile and Shrinkage and Creep Parameters

8. We now need to create a temperature profile and enter values in the shrinkage
and shear parameters.
Click on the Calculate|Analyse... menu option to open the Pre-tensioned
Beam Analysis form. Click on the Set parameters for drop down and select
Differential temperature 2/17.3 from the list of options.
The program will open the AS 5100 Part 2 Section 17.3 Temperature Profile
form and display the default positive and reverse temperature profiles.

Click on OK to use this temperature profile.

Next, click on the Set parameters for drop down and select Shrinkage and
creep from the list of options. This will open the Data for Shrinkage & Creep
form.

5-8

Set the Shrinkage strain to -0.00025, the Shrinkage before in situ cast to
20%, the Differential shrinkage strain to -0.0001 and the Residual creep
factor to 1.5".

Click OK to save the parameters.

Tendon Optimisation
9. The next step is to design the required tendon layout.
To do this, click on the Tendon Optimisation button on the Pre-tensioned
Beam Analysis form. This will open the Tendon Optimisation form. Tick both
the Applied Load tick boxes and the Straight and Debond tick boxes. Use the
default values for all the other fields on the form.
Click on the Design Optimised Layout button. The program will now consider
a series of tendon arrangements to come up with the optimised layout for the
beam. Click OK to close the Tendon Optimisation form.

Design for Shear

10. The next step is to check the beam for shear.
Click on the Analyse for drop down and select Shear force + BM 1 and
ensure that the Ultimate limit state radio button is selected.

5-9

Shear Link and Transverse Reinforcement Requirements

The next step is to design the shear links in the beam.
Click on the Results button to view the shear calculations. Scroll down to the
bottom of the results to see summary of link requirements.

We are going to design the shear links at 7 locations. These are:

0.0912m
0.912m
5.4m
11m
16.6m
21.088m
21.909m

The best way to carry out this design is to introduce additional points of interest
(POI) along the length of the beam.
11. Close the Results Viewer and go to the Reinforced Concrete Beam Analysis
form and click on the Points of Interest... button. This will open the Points of
Interest form. Click on the point after the location where you want to insert a
POI and click on the + button near the bottom of the form. This will add a
new point half way between the two points either side of it. The new point will
have a ticked tickbox next to it. Double click in the Position along span column
and enter a value of 5.4m. The new point will now be shown in the table.
Scroll down and add another point of interest at 16.6m. Close the form.

5-10

Use the arrows by the Design section for results printout field to select point 2
at 0.0912m then click on the Results button. Scroll to the bottom of the
results and look at the table for link arrangement.

From the table we can see that there are several possible arrangements that
could be used. The best arrangement would be 2 legs of 16mm fitments at
125mm spacing. (It is worth noting that the Results Viewer also states that the
maximum permissible spacing is 300mm).
12. We can repeat this for the other locations to get the following results:
Location

Diameter

Legs

Spacing

0.0912m

16mm

125mm

0.912m

16mm

150mm

5.4m

16mm

300mm

11m

16mm

300mm

16.6m

16mm

300mm

21.088m

16mm

150mm

21.909m

16mm

125mm

13. Finally we will use the results to define the transverse reinforcement
requirement to resist longitudinal shear at shear plane 2-2.
Click on the Analyse for field and select Longitudinal shear 1 from the drop
down list. For this example, set the design section location to the left hand end

5-11

(point 1) and click on the Results button. Scroll down to the bottom of the
results so you can see the reinforcement requirement across shear plane 2-2:

Repeat this for the other locations then close the results viewer and click OK
to close the Pre-tensioned Beam Analysis form.
When the analysis form is open the results graphs can be displayed in a 3D
isometric window by clicking on the
icon on the graphics window.

Also, it is worth noting that when the print preview window is opened by clicking
on the
icon at the top of the graphic window, a pdf of the graphic window
can be generated by clicking on the
icon at the top of the print preview
window.
14. Click on the File|Save As... menu item. Set the file name to My AU Example
5_1.sam and click on the Save button.
15. Close the program.

Summary
In this example we have taken a prestressed beam created in a previous example
and applied load to it for a series of design load cases. We have also carried out a
tendon optimisation then checked the beam for a series of design criteria.

5-12

6. Analysis - Model Definition

Contents
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.

Line Beam Definition .................................................................................................. 6-3

Portal Frame Definition .............................................................................................. 6-7
3D Truss footbridge ................................................................................................. 6-19
Simple Grillage......................................................................................................... 6-33
Finite Element Slab .................................................................................................. 6-45

6-1

6-2

6.1. Line Beam Definition

Subjects Covered:
Line Beam Analysis; Line Beam Geometry; Drop In Span; Parametric Shapes

Outline
It is required to form a five span line beam analysis model to represent a reinforced
concrete T beam, with dimensions as shown below. The first span is an 8m
cantilever and the third span consists of two cantilevers at each end supporting a 15m
drop in span. The beam is constructed of grade 40 concrete (Elastic modulus
35kN/mm2)
To model the drop in span we specify the line beam to have 7 spans and specify the
supports at the internal bearing locations accordingly.

Each span is split into 1m segments which will define the results output locations.
Once the beam is defined, produce a full data summary report in pdf format and save
the data file for use in another example.

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options |Project Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New |Structure.

Create line beam geometry

3. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Line Beam to start a line beam
analysis.
4. Set the title to 5 Span Line Beam with a sub title of Example 6.1 using the
Data |Titles menu option. Also set the Job Number: to 6.1 and put your
initials in the Calculations by: field.
5. Click on the Structure Geometry icon to open the Line Beam Geometry form.
6-3

6. Set the Number of Spans: field to 7 and press the Enter key. The graphics will
update to show the new configuration.
7. In the table, double-click on the Span Length field in row 1 and type in a value
of 8. Enter appropriate span lengths in the other rows as shown in the table
below. (rows 7 & 8 are hidden but the last span length is 10).

8. Specify the support conditions such that all span ends are fixed in
displacement but free to rotate (the default), but then free the displacement at
the end of the cantilever (row 1) and each end of the drop in span (rows 4 & 5).
This will be shown in the graphics as:

9. Finally, change the value in Divide Shortest Span into: to 5, which will split the
smallest span into 1m segments. The longest span is updated automatically.
Close the form using the OK button.

6-4

Define Section Properties

10. Change the navigation pane on the left hand side of the
screen to Section Properties by selecting the button at
the bottom.
11. Click on the + Add button at the top to display the
selection list as shown and pick Parametric Shapes. In
the Parametric Shape Properties form change the Shape
Reference: to T and then set height: to 1000mm, width:
to 1500mm, web thickness: to 500mm and :flange
thickness to 200mm.

12. Enter a Description: as RC T Beam, Elastic Modulus: as

35kN/mm2 and a Shear Modulus: of 14.6kN/mm2 to
reflect that we are using grade 40 concrete. Change the
Density to 23.54kN/m3.
13. To assign this property to all members in the structure
draw a window round the whole structure in the Structure
Graphics screen (Click at the top LH corner and release,
move the cursor to the bottom RH corner and click again).
The selected Beams turn red.
14. Close the Parametric Shape Properties form using the OK button
15. Use the menu item File |Save as... to save the data file with a name of My AU
Example 6_1.sst.
16. Close the program.

Summary
A Line Beam model is very easy to put together as the geometry is very simple. In
this way it is a very efficient method of analysis for preliminary design.

6-5

However, it must be remembered that a line beam only considers in plane vertical
displacement and rotation about a perpendicular axis (ie. dz and ry degrees of
freedom). This will of course mean that only two member actions are valid at the ends
of each beam segment (ie. moment MY and shear FZ).
If torsions, axial forces or transverse bending effects are significant in a structure then
a line beam will not represent them.

6-6

6.2. Portal Frame Definition

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D Frame; Sub Model Planes; Drawing 2D Members; Splitting
Members; Importing Sections; Copying Properties; Filtering; Rotating Local Axes;
Copying 2D Sub Models; Renumbering Joints; Support Conditions; Member Release
of Degrees of Freedom; User Notes; Data Reports

Outline
It is required to form a two storey, single bay, building frame analysis model as shown
below. Each storey is 8m high and the column spacing is 10m. All joints have full
connection except at the ends of the first floor beams, where there is full shear and
axial continuity, but no moment connection. All frame members are constructed with
grade 350 structural steel (Elastic modulus 200kN/mm2, Shear modulus 76.9kN/mm2).
To model the beam column joint accurately we will place a model node at the face of
the column as well as the column centre. The short member between these nodes
will have stiff properties (say 103 greater than the actual beam). This will ensure that
the moment releases applied to the ends of the actual beam are in the correct
location.

Each beam and column is split into 10 segments which will define the results output
locations.
The beam and column sections have been defined in the section module and are
loaded as external files.

6-7

Once the frame is defined, produce a full data summary report in pdf format and save
the data file for use in another example using the name Two Span Single Bay
Frame.sst.

Procedure
Setup & Geometry
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options |Project Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New| Structure.
3. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Refined Analysis to start a refined
analysis.
4. Set the title to 2 Storey Single Bay Frame with a sub title of Example 6.2
using the Date |Titles menu option and put your initials in the Calculations by:
field.
5. In the Structure navigation window click on the
button
and select 2D Sub Model from the selection list. This will
create an entry in the navigation tree and open the 2D Sub
Model Plane form.
6. We wish to define this frame in the XZ plane, so click on the
button and you will notice the axes change in the
graphics. Close the Sub Model Plane form with the OK
button.

7. To create the structural members open the Sub Model

Members form by clicking on the
element in
the Structure tree.
8. To create a member we simply draw it in the graphics window
making use of an appropriate snap mode. Initially click on the
icon in the graphics toolbar.
9. Then click on the origin of the graphics screen followed by another click 8m in
the vertical direction (Count the grid points as the Snap: mode should be set to
grid).
6-8

10. If the member is drawn wrongly, simply click on the Edit Members item in the
Member Tasks list and change the coordinates in the displayed form before
closing this form with the OK button.
11. To draw the second column we use the Copy Member(s) item in the Member
Task list and enter a translation vector of (10,0) before clicking on the Apply
button.

12. Now draw the transverse beam between the top two nodes of the column by
following the same procedure as in 8 above, but setting the Snap: mode on the
graphics toolbar to Node in Plane.
13. We now need to split the two columns into 10 segments each. This is done by
using Split Beam Element... in the Member task list.
14. In the Split Beam Element form set Split specified beam element by/ specified
division by clicking on the appropriate radio button controls. And then set the
Number of new elements to 10.
15. Click on the leftmost column in the graphics (turns red) and then click on the
Apply button to see the 10 segments generated in the graphics window.
16. Repeat 14 for the rightmost column.
6-9

17. Now click on the beam, but set Number of new elements to 3 (hit enter to
update the table) and change the segment lengths in the table to 0.15m,
9.7m and 0.15m. Click on the Apply button to split the beam

18. Now click on the middle segment of the beam and split this into 8 equal length
segments using the Apply button. Close the Split Beam Element form with
the OK button. Use the Fit View icon
on the graphics toolbar to fill the
graphics screen with the structure.

Section Properties
We are now going to define and assign some section properties to the
structure so far.
19. Close the Define Sub Model Members form with the OK button and change
the Navigation window to Section Properties by clicking on
at
the bottom of the window.

6-10

20. Click on the

button and choose Design Section
from the list of options. This will display the Import file
form in which the Browse... button should be clicked.
Select the file called AU Example 6_2 Beam
Section.sam in the file browser and Open this file.
21. The graphics will now have two parts to the window
the first part the structure and the second part the
section.
22. Using the right mouse button in the graphics area, a
number of tab and tile options can be selected to
customise the layout of the window panes. Set it to Tile
Vertically.

23. In the structure graphics, use the

toolbar button to
obtain a view on the xz plane and then window round the
horizontal beam elements (using a left mouse click at the
top left hand corner , releasing the button and moving the
cursor to the bottom right corner and clicking again)
taking care not to select any of the column members.
The selected members will turn red.
24. Before closing the Import Beam File form with the OK button, change the
description to Beam section 700WB150 by selecting it from the drop down
list.

6-11

25. Repeat 20 & 24 but import the file called AU Example 6_2 Column
Section.sam and change the Description: to be Column section 310UC158 .
26. To select the column members, window round the whole structure and when
the Confirm window asks whether the beam elements should be overwritten
answer No to All. Close the Import File form in the normal way.

Modify Section Properties

As described in the outline we now need to enhance the stiffness of the short
elements at the ends of the beam. To do this we copy the standard beam
property, increase the elastic and shear modulus and then overwrite the
property of these elements with the new property.
27. Right mouse click over the beam section property in the navigation window and
select copy from the popup menu. This will create a new property and open
the data form (Import data file form) allowing changes to be made. Change
both elastic modulus and shear modulus by increasing them by a factor of
1000 and then changing the Description to Stiff.

28. To assign this property to the two short beam elements it is necessary to switch
on the node markers and zoom in to each of the top corners. To switch on
node markers use the orange General button at the right of the graphics
window and tick the Show Nodes option.

6-12

29. To zoom in, place the cursor over one of the corners and either use the mouse
scroll wheel or click on the
graphics toolbar button several times. When the
short beam element is clear, click on it to assign the stiff property (agreeing to
overwrite the existing property).
30. Repeat this for the other corner and then close the Import File form.

Local Axes
The section properties defined are related to a certain set of axes and these
must be consistent with the local axes of the beam elements. The YY axis of
the sections is the horizontal axis parallel to the flanges, so the local y axis of
all the beam and column members must be perpendicular to the plane of the
frame. To check this we can turn on the local axis display using the orange
General button on the graphics window and tick the Local Axes box.
The red axis is the YY axis so, it can be seen that the column members are
orientated in the wrong way. Additionally, if we want the bending moment
diagrams to show sagging moments always on the inside of the frame then the
local Z axis should always be pointing to the outside of the frame. This means
the local axis system of the members should be rotated to correct this.
31. To do this the leftmost column members should be rotated by 90 degrees and
the rightmost by -90 degrees. This can be done by changing the Navigation
window to Structure and using the Add button to open Advanced beam Set
|Local Axes. In the resulting form, Twist: should be set to 90 degrees and
then the leftmost column selected graphically (to do this use the following
procedure:
a. Select the filter toolbar button

on the graphics screen

b. Click on De-select all in the selection tasks

c. Set the Select By: field to Section Property
d. Available groups Column Section ... sent to selected groups using
the> button.
e. OK
f. Window round the leftmost column
g. Set the name of the Advanced Beam Set to Twist 90
h. OK
32. Add a second Advanced beam Set |Local but set the Twist: to -90. Change
the name of this property to Twist -90. The current filter will allow the
windowing around just the right column without selecting any beams.
33. Click on the small arrow next to the filter and select Select all to remove the
filter. It can be seen that all the y axes (red) are now perpendicular to the
plane of the frame and all the z axes are pointing to the outside of the frame.

6-13

Copying Members
34. The single storey can now be copied to create the second storey. To do this
we open the Define Sub Model Members form by clicking on the Sub Model
Members entry in the navigation window. Select all the members by first getting
focus on the table by clicking on the first member in the list and then use the
keyboard to press the <Ctrl> and <A> keys together. Click on Copy Member(s)
in the Members Tasks list to open the Copy Member Selection form and enter
a Translation vector of (0m, 8m) before clicking on the Apply button and then
the OK button to close the forms.

35. In the Graphics window click on the toolbar icon

to fit the structure to the
window. Switch off the local axis display using the orange General button.

Renumbering Nodes
Because the structure has been created by splitting members and then copying
the node and member numbers do not form a logical pattern. These next steps
are not absolutely necessary but it makes the reading of output tables a bit
easier. We will now renumber the nodes in a more logical manner.

Required Column Numbering

Required Beam Numbering

6-14

36. Open the Joint Details form from the Navigation window and change the
graphics view to an XZ view by clicking on the toolbar icon .
37. From the toolbar open the filter form using the button
, Deselect all then
Select By Section Property, choosing the beam section from the list and
moving it to the Selected Groups with . Click on the Save in Member Set
Tasks and enter a name of Beams Only before closing the Save Member
Selection form with OK. Now close the Filter form with OK.

38. Click on Sort in Table Tasks and in the Sort form Sort by Z and Then by X
(both ascending). Close this form with OK
39. Now click on Renumber in the Joint Tasks List. In the Renumber form set the
Renumber Range to All in Filter and the Start Number to 101before clicking on
the Apply button and then OK. Scrolling up and down the list of joints, using
the arrows on the keyboard, will illustrate the joint sequence in the graphics
window.

40. We now change the Filter to show just the columns in the same way as for the
beams in 36..., saving this filter with a name of Columns Only.
41. Click on Sort in Table Tasks and in the Sort form Sort by X and Then by Z
(both ascending). Close this form with OK.
42. Renumber the filtered joints from 1 in the same way as in 39 above and then
close the Joint Details form with OK.

6-15

43. To do the same thing for member numbers open the Member details form by
clicking on Member Details in the Navigation Window.
44. Filter on Columns Only, using the filter drop down list displayed when the Down
Arrow next to the filter icon is clicked, and sort by Lowest Joint Ref. Renumber
the filtered members from 1. (Use Renumber from the Member Task tool
bar).
45. Filter on just Beams Only and sort by Lowest Joint Ref. Renumber the filtered
members from 41.
46. Filter on stiff elements using the Section Properties in the filter form (remember
to deselect all first).
47. There is no need to sort these members but just renumber from 101.
48. Remove all filters.

Supports
49. We now need to support the structure by fixing certain degrees of freedom of
the two joints at the base of the columns. Click on Structure in the navigation
tree and then click on the Add button. Select Supported Nodes from the list. In
the graphics toolbar change Along Span End Lines to All Joints and then
click on the two base joints in the graphics window. Both joints will have the
same fixity, so they will be Uniform. Change all degrees of freedom except
Rotation Restraint about Y to Fixed before closing the form with OK.

Release of Member Degrees of Freedom

50. The first floor beam needs to be simply supported at its ends, so it is necessary
to release the RY degree of freedom at the beam ends. In the Structure
navigation window click on
and select Advanced Beam Set|Releases
from the displayed list.
51. Change the name of the releases to Free RY and change the Moment y: field
to Free. Set the filter to Beam Only and click on the two ends of the first
floor beam. A small cyan circle will appear near to the end of the member
selected. Click OK to close the form.

6-16

User Notes
52. It is good practice to make a note of any modelling techniques used in your
model so that others can check it more readily. Open up the User Notes form
using the menu item Data|Notes... Enter the following text into the form:
To model the first floor simply supported beam additional nodes have
been place along the beam at the location of the column faces. This will
enable member releases to be applied at this location and model the
eccentricity of the beam reaction into the column. The short beams
connecting the beam ends to the columns will have a stiffness 1000
greater than the standard beam by adjusting the elastic and shear
modulus accordingly.
53. Close the User Notes form with OK.

Data Reports
54. Now create a data summary and save as a pdf file using the menu item
File|Data Reports... Click on the Include all button and then the View
button. In the Results Viewer form click on the
tab to display the
results in pdf format. To save this as a file click on the
save icon in the
toolbar and enter a name of Portal frame data report.pdf before closing the
Results Viewer and the Data Reports form.
55. Finally save the data file using the menu item File|Save as... using a file name
of Two Storey Single Bay Frame_AU.sst
56. Close the program.

Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the Refined Analysis module and
demonstrates the basic principles of creating structural elements in a sub-model,
manipulating these elements and assigning properties. Special care is taken when
assigning properties with respect to local axis definitions. Member releases and User
notes are also introduced.

6-17

6-18

6.3. 3D Truss footbridge

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 3D Frame; Setting Out Objects - Arcs; Construction Lines; 2D Sub
models; Drawing 2D Beam Members; Copying Sub Models; 3D Sub Models; Drawing
3D Beam Members; Filtering; Importing sections; Parametric Shapes; Structure Plots;
Data Summary

Outline
This model is of a 55m span steel truss footbridge, curved in elevation, constructed
with square hollow sections for the bottom boom members and circular hollow
sections for the top boom and bracing. The deck spans between the two bottom
boom members and is braced diagonally with angles. British steel sections are used
for this particular example.

6-19

Plan of Top Boom and Bracing

Plan of Bottom Boom, Deck Members and Deck Bracing

The top boom is a 406x16 Circular Hollow section

The bottom boom is 400x400x20 Square Hollow section
All other members except the deck members and deck bracing are 324x12 Circular
Hollow section
The deck is constructed from 6mm thick steel plate, transversely stiffened with
inverted T sections welded to the underside of the plate. The T sections are
400mm deep with a 100mm wide flange and is 10mm thick throughout. They are
spaced at 500mm centres. Each transverse member in the bottom will be as shown
below.

The deck is braced diagonally as shown in the plan with 75x75x12 steel angle.
The material throughout is structural steel with an elastic modulus of 200kN/mm2, a
shear modulus of 77kN/mm2 and a weight density of 77kN/m3

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options |Project Templates menu item.
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New |Structure.
3. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Refined Analysis to start a refined
analysis.
4. Set the Structure Title to 3D Truss Footbridge with a sub title of Example 6.3
using the Date |Titles menu option. Set the Job Number to 6.3 and put your
initials in the Calculations by: field.

6-20

Structure Geometry
The structure will be built up using four separate sub models: One for each
truss, one for the top boom connecting members and another for the deck and
bracing.
The geometry of the first truss is defined by creating two curved arcs along the
lines of the top and bottom boom and then placing vertical construction lines at
the location of each of the truss connections. Members can then be drawn on
the graphics screen by snapping to the intersection points.
The first truss can be copied to form the second truss and then connecting
members can be drawn between them.
5. To start, add a new 2D sub model to the Structure navigation window, as
described in example 6.2, with its plane in the XZ plane. Rename the submodel
to Truss 1 by clicking on it in the navigation window with the right mouse
button and choosing the Rename option which allows text to be entered in the
new name: field.

6. With the new sub model highlighted add a Setting Out Object by using the Add
button and selecting the appropriate option.
7. Click on the small + at the bottom of the Define Setting Out Object form to
add a line segment. Choose Arc from the Pick a type: list and click on the
Next button.

8. The method we will choose to define the curve of the bottom boom is 3 points
on curve click on the Next button.

6-21

9. Enter the three coordinates as (0.0, 0.0) (27.5, 0.688) (55.0, 0.0) and then click
on the Next button.

10. If the curve appears correct close the wizard with the OK button otherwise
use the Back button to re-enter incorrect data.
11. Change the Name: of the setting out object to Bottom Boom Curve before
closing the form with the OK button.

12. Repeat 6 to 11 to create a second setting out object but use coordinates (0.0,
3.375) (27.5, 5.188) (55.0, 3.375) and a Name: of Top Boom Curve.
13. Add a third setting out line 3 vertically at the left end by repeating 6 to 11 but
selecting start and end points and choosing a line rather than an arc and use
coordinates (0.0, 0.0) and (0.0, 6.0). Set the Name: to Vertical at x=0.
6-22

14. To create a series of vertical lines that will intersect with the top and bottom
booms, Add | construction lines offset parallel to SO3 with offsets as shown in
the elevation drawing above (see the introduction to Part 6.3 of this manual).
The first offset is at 2.475m. The bottom half of the table is shown below.

15. There are 20 lines in total. The lines are added by selecting the Line Type
+Offset parallel to SOL on the left of the form. Select S03 in the SOL Ref.
and enter the offset accordingly. Once all lines have been created close the
form with the OK button.

16. We will now connect the intersection points of these lines to create the beam
members of the truss. This is done by opening the Define Sub Model Members
form by clicking on the Sub Model Members item in the navigation tree.
17. Select the draw mode in the graphics toolbar to multiple members
and then
set the snap mode to Intersection. Now draw the first member of the bottom
boom by clicking close to the first intersection point from the left then the third
point.
18. The remaining members of the bottom boom can be created by continuing the
clicking on intersection points five, seven ...etc until the last point is clicked
then the Esc key on the keyboard will stop the selection. Any members
drawn incorrectly can be deleted, by highlighting them in the table and clicking
on the small - button at the bottom of the table, and then drawn again
correctly.
19. This can be repeated for the top boom except the intersection numbers will be
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 21 (note how the centre member is split
in two to give a node at the apex).
6-23

20. Draw the two end vertical members using the single member draw mode
toolbar icon by clicking on the bottom intersection then the top.
21. The diagonal bracing can now be drawn as multiple members, zigzagging from
bottom to top across the truss.
22. The members of the truss can be seen more clearly in the graphics if the
construction lines and Setting out objects are turned off using the orange
Objects button on the right of the graphics screen.

23. Close the Define Sub Model Members form with the OK button.
24. Copy this complete sub-model to the second side and rename the second submodel Truss 2. This is done by right clicking on the first sub model entry in
the navigation window and selecting the Copy option.
25. In the Copy Sub Model form click on the Define button to define a new origin
and plane for the copied sub model.

6-24

26. Set the origin to (0.0, 3.5, 0.0) then click on the Next button.
27. The orientation of the plane does not need changing for the new sub-model so
click on Next on the next two forms then OK to confirm.
28. To actually create the new set of members click on the Next button on the
Copy Sub Model form and then OK to confirm.
29. Rename this new Submodel to Truss 2 in the same way as the first.
30. To view the two trusses in isometric click on the Structure item in the
navigation window and use the appropriate toolbar button
if necessary.
31. Add a new 3D sub-model to the Structure in the navigation window and in the
graphics screen set the Draw Mode to single member . Draw the top boom
transverse connecting members one by one by clicking on the node points in
the graphics screen. The structure may need rotating into a suitable
orientation to achieve this. Panning and zooming options in the toolbar may
also benefit node selection.
First Click

Second
Click

32. Add the top diagonal bracing in the same way but use the multiple beam
members option , finishing with the Esc key when the last member has
been drawn.
33. Close the Define Sub Model Members form with the OK button.
34. Rename the 3D sub Model to Top Bracing.
35. Add an additional 3D sub-model and repeat the exercise in 31 to 34 above but
name it Bottom Bracing & Deck. The graphics orientation and zoom will need
adjusting to achieve this. Note the different layout between the top and bottom
bracing.
36. In the Navigation window +Add a Supported Nodes item to the Structure.
Change the view direction to Isometric using the
graphics toolbar button.
Also in the toolbar change the Along Span End dropdown field to All Joints. In
the graphics window click on the two nodes at the near end of the bottom boom
members. This will add small square support icons at these locations and add
6-25

two entries into the supports table. Repeat this for the two nodes at the other
end of the bottom boom members.
37. In the Define Support Nodes form set the Group Type: to Variable and then
change the X Direct Restraint to Free for the second two nodes. Close the
Define Supported Nodes form using the OK button.

Section Properties
38. Change the Navigation window to Section Properties by clicking on
at the bottom of the navigation window.
The sections for all but the deck bracing have already been created in section
files, so these can be imported. The deck bracing is defined by a parametric
shape.
39. Using the
button at the top of the navigation window select the Design
Section from the drop down list.
40. In the Import file form that will now be displayed click on the browse button and
Open the file called AU Example 6_3 324x12 CHS.sam.
41. In the graphics screen, right mouse click, and choose the option Tile Vertically
to display the section and structure as shown below.

42. In the Import file form change the name in the Description field to 324x12
CHS by manually typing it in the field. It is worth noting that the drop down list
in the Description: field can also be used to change the name (as shown
below). All other data will remain unchanged as this has been defined in the
section file.

6-26

43. Close the Import file form with the OK button.

44. Repeat 39 to 43 for the other sections using section files called:
i. AU Example 6_3 400x400x20 SHS.sam
ii. AU Example 6_3 406x16 CHS.sam
iii. AU Example 6_3 Stiffened Deck Plate.sam
Use appropriate names from the Description: drop down list.
45. The last section to define is an L parametric shape for the deck bracing.
Using the
button at the top of the navigation window select the
Parametric Shape option from the drop down list.
46. In the Parametric Shape Properties form set Shape Reference to L, height:
and width: to 75mm, thickness of horizontal: and thickness of vertical: to
12mm.

47. Also change the Elastic Modulus: to 200kN/mm2, the Shear Modulus: to
77kN/mm2, the Density: to 78kN/m3 and the Description: to 75x75x12
Angle before closing the form with the OK button.

6-27

48. We now need to assign the various sections to the beam members in the
structure. Click on the 400x400x20 SHS item in the navigation window to
reopen the data form (Import file). This section needs to be assigned to the
bottom boom members of the two trusses.
This could be done by clicking on each bottom boom member individually in
the graphics window but we will use filtering and orientation to make this a little
simpler.
49. To filter the structure to just the two trusses, click on the filter button in the
graphics toolbar. Because the toolbar is shortened due to the combined
display with the section this may be hidden so the small triangle at the end of
the toolbar must be clicked to display it.

50. In the Member Selection Filter form click on the De-select all item in the
Selection Tasks. Then change Select By: to Sub Model Group. Double click
on Truss 1 and Truss 2 to move them to the Selected Groups: as shown before
closing the form with the OK button.

51. Change the view of the structure, to view it from the South, by using the
graphics toolbar button
.
52. Window round the bottom boom members as shown to assign this section to
the selected members in both trusses.

6-28

53. Close the data form for this section with the OK button then open the Section
Data form for 406x16 CHS. This can be assigned to the top boom members in
the same way as 52 above.
54. To assign the properties for the other beams we first remove the filter by
clicking on the small arrow next to the filter icon and choosing Select All from
the list.
55. Open the Import file form for the section 324x12 CHS. Change Inclusive Box
to Excusive box in the graphics toolbar and then window round the top boom
of the structure. This is in effect a crossing box (dotted) that will select all
members wholly within the box and any member that is crossed by it

56. It will try to overwrite the top boom members already defined but a confirmation
box allow this not to happen by selecting the No to All button.

57. It may appear in the graphics that the top boom members have been selected
(turned red) but in fact it is the bracing which is shown. This can be confirmed
by changing the view to an isometric view. Click on the OK button in the
Import file form to close it.
58. The Stiffened deck plate property and the 75x75x12 angle bracing can be
assigned in a similar way. This is done by first filtering the structure to the
Bottom Bracing & deck sub model, as described in 49 and 50 above. Then
assigning the property, member by member, by clicking on them individually in
the graphics screen. Assign 75x75x12 angle properties to the diagonal bracing
6-29

members in the bottom deck. Assign the stiffened Deck Plate properties to
other members in the bottom deck.

Producing Reports
59. The structure is now completely defined. It is required to produce two graphical
reports to show the node numbering of Truss 1 and Truss 2.
60. With all data forms closed and just the graphics window visible, filter the model
to just Truss 1. This can be done by using the drop down selection displayed
when the small arrow at the right of the filter button is clicked.
61. Click on the Orange General button on the right of the graphics window and
tick the boxes for Annotate Joints, Show Nodes and Filtered Members Only.
The display can be viewed as a Print preview before printing a hard copy.
This is done by clicking on the print preview icon on the graphics toolbar
.

62. You can see that there is nothing on the preview to say what part of the
structure we are looking at. User titles can be added at this stage to highlight
this. Click on the preview menu item Format |Titles and tick the box for Show
User Title Block. A title of Truss 1 showing node numbers can then be added
in the text field before closing the Titles form with the OK button. The new
title can now be seen added to the graphics.

6-30

63. Print a hard copy, if required, using the File | Print menu item then close the
Print Preview window using File | Close.
64. Repeat 60 to 63 with the filter and titles set for Truss 2 then remove the filter on
the structure and set the viewing direction in the graphics to isometric.
65. Now create a data summary and save as a pdf file using the menu item File
|Data Reports... Click on the Include all button and then the View button.
Click OK on the warning message. In the Results Viewer form click on the
tab at the bottom of the window to display the results in pdf format.
Note that you can navigate to different sections of the report using the
hyperlinks displayed on the first page.
66. To save this as a file click on the
save icon in the toolbar and enter a name
of 3D Truss Footbridge Data Summary.pdf before closing the Results Viewer
and the Data Reports form.
67. Finally save the data file using the menu item File |Save as... using a file name
of My AU Example 6_3.sst.
68. Close the program.

Summary
This example highlights the methods used to create a general 3D structure by building
up sub-models. It introduces curved setting out objects, and multiple construction
lines to define the geometry of each truss. Particular interest is paid to filtering of the
structure to simplify certain procedures. Note that although steel section data files
have been imported into this model, standard steel sections can be selected and
assigned directly in the model when the Section properties tab is selected.

6-31

6-32

6.4. Simple Grillage

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D ;Transition Curve Design Lines; Construction Lines; Meshing;
Slab Properties; Support Conditions; Data Reports

Outline
A flat slab, 500mm thick, is shown below with setting out dimensions. It is to be
modelled as a grillage in the program and the data file saved for analysis in section 7.

It is supported on 7 discrete bearings at each end of the slab and 2 bearings at

midspan. The two midspan bearings are parallel to the bearings at the slab ends and
are located on a line parallel to the deck centre line but running through the bearings
either side of the centre. All supports are restrained in the vertical direction but the
centre bearing at the left end is also restrained in both horizontal directions while that
at the right end additionally restrained in the transverse direction.

The mesh will have seven longitudinal members parallel to the centre line. As there is
a reasonable skew at the left end of the slab, the transverse members will be
orthogonal to the centre line to give the most accurate results. To ease the
positioning of the central supports and to provide some form of mesh refinement at
these locations, the mesh will be generated in two. The left mesh will have 5
6-33

transverse members (in the non skewed region) and the right mesh 7 transverse
members.

The single Carriageway is 12m wide with a 1.5m verge on either side and is centred
on the deck.
The concrete is grade 40 so it will have an elastic modulus of 35kN/mm2 and a shear
modulus of 14.58kN.mm2. In defining the section properties of the grillage members
it is important that the torsional stiffness of the slab is split evenly between the
longitudinal and transverse members.

Procedure
Setup
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options |Project Templates menu item
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New| Structure
3. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Refined Analysis to start a refined
analysis.
4. Use the Date |Titles menu option to set the Structure Title to Simple Curved
Grillage Model with a sub title of Example 6.4. Set the Job Number to 6.4
and put your initials in the Calculations by: field.

6-34

Design Lines
5. In the Structure navigation window click on the
button and select Design
Line from the selection list. This will create an entry in the navigation tree and
open the Define Design Line form.
A design line needs to be created to represent the
transition curve of the deck centre line.
6. Click on the small + button at the bottom of the form to
add a segment and open the Define Line Segment wizard.
7. Set the segment type to Transition Curve and click on the
Next button.
8. Set the method to start point, start and end angle, and
length (clothoid) then click on the Next button.
9. The Start Point: coordinates should be (0, 0), the Start
Angle: 20, End Angle: 0, and chainage Length: 25m.
Click Next.
10. Close the wizard with the OK button to enter the segment
into the Design line table.

11. Before closing the Define Design Line form with the OK button, change the
Name: to Deck CL.

Carriageway
12. A carriageway is added by clicking the
window and selecting Carriageway.

button at the top of the navigation

13. In the Define Carriageway form, set the design line to Deck CL and then enter
the relevant offsets as shown below. It should be noted that a negative offset

6-35

to a design line is on the left hand side as you walk along the design line. Click
on the Fit View icon in the graphics toolbar to view the carriageway fully.

14. Close the Define Carriageway form with the OK button.

Construction Lines
To define the corners of the slab it is necessary to create some vertical
construction lines that will intersect the edges of the verge. Construction lines
are created within a sub model so a new sub model needs to be created first.
15. Use the +Add button in the navigation window to add a 2D Sub Model (GCS,
z= 0) object. This sub model is automatically in the XY plane.
16. Now right click on the new sub model in the navigation window and select
+Add | Construction Lines.
17. In the Define Construction Line form, click on the + Vertical line on easting
option and enter an Offset of 3 (click on the enter key before proceeding or
the data will be lost). The blue line can be seen graphically.
18. Repeat this with offsets of 13.5 and 24 so that there are three construction
lines in the table.
6-36

19. Close the Define Construction Line form with the OK button.
20. At this point save the data file as My AU Example 6_4 Curved Slab Layout.sst
using the main menu File | Save as...

Grillage mesh
21. We can now define the two meshes. Right mouse click on the 2D sub Model in
the navigation window and select +Add |Mesh. This will display the Define
Mesh form.
22. Set Name: to be Left Span, Mesh Type: to be Splay orthogonal to DL/SOL,
Pick: by object and Member Type: to Beam Elements.

The boundary of the mesh is then picked graphically by selecting the four
boundary edges of this span. They must be picked so that consecutive lines
intersect (in order) and the first line defines the general longitudinal direction,
the second defines which is the positive direction (as can be shown by the
arrow in the graphics).
23. Start on the bottom verge line, then the middle construction line, next the top
verge line and lastly the leftmost construction line.

6-37

4
1

24. Set the no. of Longitudinal members to 7 and Transverse to 5 and note the
change in the graphics. The first mesh is now complete so close the form with
the OK button.
25. Repeat 21 to 24 but set the name to Right Span and pick the boundary of the
right span. The other parameters can be copied from the first mesh by clicking
on the Copy Mesh Details From button although the number of transverse
members needs adjusting to 7.
26. Click on Structure in the navigation window and in the graphics screen change
the viewing direction to plan view by using the icon
. The mesh should now
look like the picture below:

27. As well as the main longitudinal and transverse members, the mesh generation
has created rows of members along each of the span end lines, which could
represent diaphragm members in many forms of deck. This row of members
along the middle span end line is not required so we will remove them.
This is done by first clicking on the Members Details item in the Structure
navigation window, which opens the Member Details data form.
28. We can remove each unwanted member by clicking on it in the graphics
window and then clicking the small - button at the bottom of the table.

6-38

29. Close the Member Details form with the OK button.

Span End Lines

30. Before positioning supports we will define the span ends by drawing the span
end lines. This is done by right clicking on Structure in the navigation window
and selecting +Add | Span End Lines.
31. The coordinates of each end of the lines could be entered manually into the
table but it is easier to set the Snap: mode (Graphics toolbar) to Intersection
and pick the joints of the mesh coinciding with the span ends. The sequence
of clicks to give three lines would be as follows:

32. Close the Define Span End Lines data form with the OK button.

Supports
33. Click the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Supported Nodes to open the Define Supported nodes form.
Each node along the two outer span end lines and two of the nodes along the
middle span end line needs supporting. This is most easily achieved by
supporting all nodes under the span end lines and then removing the ones not
required.

6-39

34. In the graphics window box round the whole structure in the normal way which
will place a support on each node under the span end lines (this is because
one of the select: options in the graphics toolbar is set to Along Span End
Lines).
35. Now change the Select: option in the graphics toolbar from Create to
Remove and then click on the unwanted nodes to leave the following: ( note
that the Select: mode automatically changes to all joints to do this)

36. In the Define Supported Nodes form you will see that the Group Type: is set to
Uniform, which means all the support conditions are the same. Set the
restraints such that all degrees of freedom are Free except Direct Restraint Z,
which is Fixed.
37. Now change the Group type: to Variable, which allows each support to have
different constraints applied. We also change the Select mode (in the graphics
window) to Create.
38. To fix the X and Y translational constraints on the centre support along the left
span end line we first click on this one support node in the graphics screen
(which highlights it in the table). In this row of the table we change the X and Y
Direct Restraints to Fixed.
39. Item 38 is repeated for the centre support under the right span end line, except
that we only change the Y Direct Constraint to Fixed.

6-40

40. Close the Define Supported Nodes form using the OK button.

Properties
There are only two properties to define
i. The 500mm thick slab property which can be
assigned to all members except the leftmost
diaphragm members.
ii. A parametric rectangular shape member 10mm by
10mm as a nominally low stiffness member assigned
to the leftmost diaphragm members.
41. We first change the Structure navigation window to the Section Property by
clicking on the Section Properties button at the bottom of the window.
42. Click on the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Continuous Slab.
43. In the Continuous Slab Properties form, change the Depth: to 500, the Elastic
Modulus: to 35 and the Shear Modulus: to 14.58.

44. Window round the whole structure to assign this property to all members.
45. Close the Continuous Slab Properties form with the OK button.
46. Click on the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Parametric Shapes.
47. In the Parametric Shape Properties form, change the Shape Reference: to
Rectangle and enter a width & depth: of 10. The Elastic Modulus: should be
set to 35 and the Shear Modulus: to 14.58. Set the Description: to
Nominal.
48. Now assign this property to the leftmost line of diaphragm members by
selecting them in the graphics window (this can be done by boxing round
them). You will be asked to confirm that you wish to overwrite the properties
already assigned to these members answer Yes to All in the confirmation
form.

6-41

49. Close the Parametric Shape Properties form with the OK button.
50. Save the data file using the main menu File | Save as... with a name of My BS
Example 6_4.sst.

Data Reports
One of the first things we will do is create a graphical plot showing all the node
and element numbers in one of the spans
51. In the Navigation window Click on the Structure item. In the graphics window
toolbar click on the filter button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
52. Click on the Selection Task De-Select all. Change Select By: to Mesh and
then move the M1:Left Span item from the Available Group: into the Selected
Groups: by double clicking on it. Close the form with the OK button

53. In the graphics window, click on the orange General button at the right hand
side and tick the Filter Members Only option and tick the Joint and Member
Annotation objects (this window disappears automatically when the cursor is
moved away from the form).
54. Now click on the orange Objects button and de-select everything except
Beam Elements and Supported Nodes.

6-42

55. To make the annotation readable maximise the graphics screen and fit the
structure to the window with the Fit View graphics toolbar icon . Click on the
orange General button again and click on the Format button adjacent to the
Members annotation option. In the Text Setup form set the vertical offset to 12 and the colour to Blue. Close the form with the OK button.
The text should now be readable. If not, experiment with the size and
positioning of the text on the Text Setup form.
56. To get a hardcopy plot of this click on the Print Preview graphics toolbar
icon
to display the Print preview window. Use the menu item Format |
Title... to open the Titles form.
57. Tick the option for Show User Title Block and enter Joint and Member
Numbering for Span 1 in the visible text field. This preview can then be
printed on your system printer by using the File |Print menu item before
closing the preview window. (When the print preview window is open, a pdf of
the graphic window can be generated by clicking on the
icon at the top of
the print preview window).
58. Restore the graphics window to its normal size.
We are now going to create a report showing the calculation of the section
properties of a row of transverse members.
59. In the main menu select File |Data Reports... In the Data Reports form, select
the Member Section Properties tab and ensure that Show Details and Show
Summary are ticked.

60. In the graphics window toolbar, click on the Filter icon to open the Member
Selection Filter form. Select Deselect All. Set the Pick Mode: to Transverse
beam and then click on one of the transverse beams in the graphics window as
shown. Switch off joint annotation in the General tab. Click OK to close the
Member Selection Filter.

6-43

61. Click on the View button on the Data Reports form to show the basic results
viewer. Although this doesnt show the graphics directly, if this form is printed
(or print preview) it will have the current graphics included at the top of the
report.
62. Alternatively, if it was required to save a high quality pdf file of this report then
click on the PDF tab at the bottom of the Data Reports form. This view can
be saved to a local pdf file.

63. Close the results viewer using the green Exit button and then close the Data
Reports form using the Done button. The program can now be closed.

Summary
This simple grillage of a curved flat slab highlights all the basic methods for creating
any grillage structure and introduces most of the tools required to create a grillage
and get data reports. The model that has been saved will be used in the loading and
analysis of this structure in section 7 of the examples manual.
6-44

6.5. Finite Element Slab

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 2D ;Transition Curve Design Lines; Construction Lines; Meshing;
Slab Properties; Support Conditions; Data Reports

Outline
A concrete slab is shown below which has the same setting out dimensions as the
slab in example 6.4. It is to be modelled as shell finite elements in Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014 and the data file saved for analysis in section 7.
The slab is generally 500mm thick but has a 2.5m wide cantilever on either edge
which is 300mm thick.
It is supported on 5 discrete bearings at each end of the slab and 2 bearings at
midspan. The layout and restraint conditions of the bearings are the same as for
example 6.4 except the four corner bearings are excluded.
Around the location of the two midspan bearings, the slab is thickened to 700mm so
as to form a column head. The lateral dimensions of this thickened slab are defined
by the mesh layout.

The mesh layout is shown below where both longitudinally and transversely, the wider
elements are twice the width of the narrower ones.

6-45

The single Carriageway is 12m wide with a 1.5m verge on either side and is centred
on the deck, as in example 6.4
The concrete is grade 40 so it will have an elastic modulus of 35kN/mm2. Poissons
ratio is assumed to be 0.2.

Procedure
Setup
1. Start the program and use the menu item File |Open to open the file called AU
Example 6_4 Curved Slab Layout.sst created in example 6.4. This will give us
the basic setting out from which we can create the FE model.
2. Use the Date |Titles menu option to set the Structure Title to Curved FE Slab
Model with a sub title of Example 6.5. Set the Job Number to 6.5 and put
your initials in the Calculations by: field.

FE mesh
3. We can now define the two meshes. Right mouse click on the 2D sub Model in
the navigation window and select +Add |Mesh. This will display the Define
Mesh form.
4. Set Name: to be Left Span, Mesh Type: to be Splay, Pick: by object and
Member Type: to Finite Elements.

6-46

The boundary of the mesh is then picked graphically by selecting the four
boundary edges of this span. They must be picked so that consecutive lines
intersect (in order) and the first line defines the general longitudinal direction,
the second defines which is the positive direction (as can be shown by the
arrow in the graphics).
5. Start on the bottom verge line, then the middle construction line, next the top
verge line and lastly the leftmost construction line.

4
1

6. Set the no. of Transverse no of elements to 16 and Longitudinal to 10 and

note the change in the graphics.
7. The spacing of the elements now needs to be adjusted so that the four
elements either side of each of the central supports is half the size of the
others. Change the size field for the transverse spacing from equal size to
set size.
8. This opens the Set Transverse Size form. The spacing factors can be set to
0.5 where narrow elements are required as shown below:

6-47

9. The other values of Dimension and Proportion are updated automatically. (the
form above does not show the full table and there are three spacing factor
values of 1 that are not shown). Close this form with the OK button.
10. Set size is used again, for the longitudinal spacing, but it is only the last two
rows in the table that have the spacing factors changed to 0.5.
11. Close the Define Mesh form with the OK button.
12. Repeat 21, 4, 5 and 6 for the second mesh but set the Name to Right Span
and pick the boundary of the right span.
13. The general mesh parameters, such as spacing, can be copied from the first
mesh by clicking on the Copy Mesh Details From button and selecting that
mesh.
14. The longitudinal spacing will need adjusting for this mesh to set the narrower
elements at the start. To do this re-select set size for the Longitudinal spacing
and then set the Spacing Factors such that they are all 1, except the first two,
which will be 0.5. Close this form with the OK button.
15. Close the Define Mesh form with the OK button.
16. Click on Structure in the navigation window and in the graphics screen change
the viewing direction to plan view by using the icon
. The mesh should now
look like the picture below:

6-48

Span End Lines

17. Before positioning supports we will define the span ends by drawing the span
end lines. This is done by right clicking on Structure in the navigation window
and selecting +Add | Span End Lines.
18. The coordinates of each end of the lines could be entered manually into the
table but it is easier to set the Snap: mode (Graphics toolbar) to Intersection
and pick the joints of the mesh coinciding with the span ends. The sequence
of clicks to give three lines would be as follows:

6
4

5
1
3

19. Close the Define Span End Lines data form with the OK button.

Supports
20. Click the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Supported Nodes to open the Define Supported nodes form.
Five nodes along the two outer span end lines and two of the nodes along the
middle span end line need supporting.
21. In the graphics window toolbar set the second Select: option to All Joints and
then click on the required supported joints as shown below.

6-49

22. In the Define Supports table you will see that the Group Type: is set to Uniform,
which means all the support conditions are the same. Set the restraints such
that all degrees of freedom are Free except Direct Restraint Z, which is Fixed.
23. Now change the Group type: to Variable, which allows each support to have
different constraints applied. We also change the Select mode to Create.
24. To fix the X and Y translational constraints on the centre support along the left
span end line we first click on it in the graphics screen (which highlights it in the
table). In this row of the table we change the X and Y Direct Restraints to
Fixed.
25. Item 24 is repeated for the centre support under the right span end line except
that we only change the Y Direct Constraint to Fixed.

26. Close the Define Supported Nodes form using the OK button.

Properties
There are three properties to define
i. The 700mm thick isotropic FE property.
ii. The 300mm thick isotropic FE property.
iii. The 500mm thick isotropic FE property.

6-50

27. We first change the Structure navigation window to the Section Property by
clicking on the Section Properties button at the bottom of the window.
28. Click on the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select Finite
Element.
29. In the Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness: to 700 and the
Elastic Modulus: to 35. Note that the Shear Modulus gets automatically
updated based upon the default Poissons ratio of 0.2.

30. Change the Description: to 700mm Grade 40 Concrete.

31. Select the 32 elements in the graphics window surrounding the two central
supports as shown. This can be done by clicking on the individual elements or
windowing around the two groups. To create the window, the Shift key on the
keyboard must be held down whilst clicking the two opposing corners. Ensure
that Select: is set to Inclusive Box in the graphics window.

Hold the shift key

whilst drawing
this window

32. Close the Finite Element Properties form with the OK button.
33. Right mouse click in the navigation window on the property just defined and
select Copy.

6-51

34. Set the Thickness: to 300, the Description: to 300mm Grade 40 Concrete
and then select the two rows of element adjacent to each curved edge of the
slab.
35. These elements can be selected by clicking on them individually, windowing
around them in groups or, if we know the element numbers, they can be listed
as a text sequence eg. 25 to 50.
36. To determine the element numbers they can be annotated on the graphics by
clicking on the orange General button on the right of the graphics screen and
then ticking the Annotation Member tick box (if this is not shown click on the
button Switch to Member No.) Zooming in and panning should show the
numbers to be:
141 to 160 1 to 20
303 to 320 177 to 194
161 162
175 176
37. To enter this text sequence click on the small text icon
at the left end of the
Assigned Members: field and type in the text as shown into the text field
displayed (remembering to click OK on the sub-form).

38. Turn off the Element Annotation in the graphics window.

39. Close the Finite Element Properties form with the OK button.
40. Right mouse click in the navigation window on the property just defined and
select Copy.
6-52

41. Set the Thickness: to 500, the Description: to 500mm Grade 40 Concrete
and then select the remaining elements of the slab in the graphics window.
42. This can be done by windowing around the whole structure and then answer
No to all when asked if you wish to overwrite previous assignments
43. Close the Finite Element Properties form with the OK button.
44. Save the data file using the main menu File | Save as... with a name of My AU
Example 6_5.sst.

Data Reports
For general data reports and graphical plots follow the procedures detailed in
previous examples (in particular example 6.4).
It is required to produce a report for the section properties of a specific finite
element to show items such as element area and aspect ratios.
45. In the main menu select File |Data Reports... In the Data Reports form, select
the Member Section Properties tab and ensure that only Show Summary is
ticked.

46. In the graphics window toolbar, click on the Filter icon to open the Member
Selection Filter form and click on the bottom left hand element in the display
before closing the form with the OK button.
47. Click on the View button on the Data Reports form to show the basic results
viewer. Although this doesnt show the graphics directly, if this form is printed
(or print preview) it will have the current graphics included at the top of the
report.
48. Alternatively, if it was required to save a high quality pdf file of this report then
click on the PDF tab at the bottom of the Data Reports form. This view can
be saved to a local pdf file.

6-53

49. Close the results viewer using the green Exit button and then close the Data
Reports form using the Done button.
50. Close the program.

Summary
This simple FE mesh of a curved flat slab highlights all the basic methods for creating
any FE mesh structure and introduces most of the tools required to create an FE
mesh and get data reports. The model that has been saved will be used in the
loading and analysis of this structure in section 7 of the examples manual.

6-54

7. Analysis - Load Definition & Solution

Contents
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.

Railway Loading on a Line Beam ............................................................................... 7-3

Portal Frame Loading and Analysis ......................................................................... 7-11
Highway Loading and Analysis of a Simple Grillage ................................................ 7-19
Dead Load & Diff Temp Load on a Finite Element Slab ........................................... 7-31

7-1

7-2

7.1. Railway Loading on a Line Beam

Subjects Covered:
Beam Loads; 300LA Rail Loads; Compilation; Envelopes; Bending Moments;
Graphical Results

Outline
It is required to analyse a five span line beam model as shown below and as defined
in example 6.1

The line beam represents half of a two beam, single track, railway viaduct. Therefore
half of the total axle load shall be input on the beam.
It is required to determine the maximum design sagging moment in spans 2 and 4 for
the ULS combination 1 design case.
Details of the loading are as follows:

Dead load of the beam is 24kN/m3 (gamma = 1.2)

Ballast is 0.2m deep and has a density of 20kN/m3 (gamma = 1.7)

Track and sleepers 5kN/m (2.5 on each beam) (gamma = 1.7)

Live load type 300LA loading assuming a gamma factor of 1.6

Five live load cases should be created for each span, one with the centre of the load
at the centre of the span and others with the centre of the load 1m & 2m either side of
this. These can then be enveloped.

Procedure
1. Start the program and then use menu item File |Open... to open the data file
with a name of AU Example 6_1.sst which was created in example 6.1.
Close the Structure overview with the Done button.
Basic Loads
2. To calculate the dead load of the beam it is necessary to determine its cross
section area so that we can apply the load as a beam load in terms of load per
unit length. To do this open up the Data Reports form using the File |Data
Reports... menu item. Tick the Include Section Property Data field and click on
the View button. This will open the Results Viewer which should show the
cross section area of the beam as 700000mm 2. This means the UDL for dead
load will be 24 x 0.7 = 16.8kN/m. Click on EXIT to close this window and then
on the Done button to close the Data Reports form.

7-3

3. Change the sub title of the example to Example 7.1 using the Date |Titles
menu option. Set the Job Number to 7.1 and put your initials in the
Calculations by: field before closing the form in the normal way.
4. Change the navigation pane on the left hand side of the screen to
Basic Loads by selecting the button at the bottom.
5. Click on the + Add button at the top to display the selection list
as shown and pick Railway Load ->300LA. In the 300LA Railway
Traffic Load form change the No. of Axle Groups to 2. Click on
the graphics window twice, near the second span (leaving at least
2 seconds between clicks). Then set Chainage: to 20.5. Ensure
that Using: is set to load centre. Change the Dynamic Load
Allowance to 0.18. The default values in the Vehicle Axle Load
and Lead Axle Load fields are 300 and 360 respectively.
Change the values in these two fields to 150 and 180
respectively to reflect the fact that each vehicle is supported by 2
beams. Click OK on the warning messages.

6. Change the Name: to 300LA Span 2 central before closing the form with the
OK button.
7. In the Navigation window right mouse click on the L1 load in the list and
select Copy from the popup menu. This adds a second load case, L2, and
opens the Define Railway Loading data form. Move the concentrated load 2m
to the left by changing the Chainage: from 20.5 to 18.5. Change the Name:
to 300LA Span 2 -2 before closing the form with the OK button.

7-4

8. Repeat this for Con -1, Con +1 and Con +2 changing the concentrated
load position and name accordingly.
9. Repeat 6, 7 and 8 for span 4 (This will actually be called Span Ref 6 in the Line
Beam Geometry form) giving 10 live loads in total. The Chainage for the
loadcase 300LA Span 4 central will be 70.5m. (Remember to set the No. of
Axle Groups field to 2, set the Dynamic Load Allowance to 0.18 and the axle
loads to those shown above on the Define Railway Loading form).
10. Click on the + Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Beam Member Load -> Longitudinal Beam Load from the selection list.
11. In the first row of the Longitudinal Beam Loading form set the Load Type to be
Uniform, Load W1 to be 17.5 (Load W2 is automatically set as it is uniform)
and the Name: to Dead Loads. To apply this load to the complete beam, box
round the whole structure in the graphics window or tick all members in the
drop down list at the end of the Assigned Members: field. Close the form with
the OK button.

12. Copy the Dead load in the same manner as for the live loads and change the
load value to 6kN/m and the name to Ballast Loads.
13. Repeat this again but change the load value to 2.5 and the name to Sleeper
& Rail Loads.
Compilations
14. Change the Navigation view to Compilations by clicking the appropriate button
at the bottom of the navigation window.
15. Click on the + Add button to add a Dead Load at Stage 1 compilation. Click
on the + button near the bottom of the form. In the first row of the compilation
table use the drop down list to select the beam dead load case. Note that the
default gamma is correct at 1.2 and change the Name: to DL ULS. Close the
form with the OK button.
16. Click on the + Add button to add a Railway Ballast & Track Load compilation.
Click on the + button near the bottom of the form twice. In the first row of the
compilation table select the ballast load case. In the second row select the
sleeper & rail load case. The gamma factor is correctly set to 1.7 automatically.
7-5

Use the default Name: of Railway Ballast ULS. Close the form with the OK
button.

17. Click on the + Add button to add a Live Load - Railway compilation. Click on
the + button near the bottom of the form. In the first row of the compilation
table use the drop down list to select the first live load case. Note that the
default gamma is correct at 1.6 and the k factor is set to a value of 1. Change
the Name: to Bending Span 2 Con Cen U1 and leave Use DLA Factor for set
to Bending Effect. Close the form with the OK button.
18. Copy this compilation in the same way as before but change the load case to
the second load and change the name accordingly.
19. Create a separate compilation for each live load case in the same way, giving a
total of 12 compilations.
Envelopes
20. To determine the max bending moment in each of spans 2 and 4 we create an
envelope. This is done using the menu item Calculate |Envelopes... to open
up the Define Envelopes form.
21. Click the mouse where it says Click Here.... and set Envelope For to Beam,
and accept all other entries as the default values except the Load Group which
should be set to Live Compilations. Click on the small + button at the
bottom of the top part of the table to add this data to the table and because All
Complying Cases is selected all live load cases are entered into the envelope
automatically. Click on the OK button to close the Define Envelopes form.

7-6

22. The load cases can now be solved using the menu Item Calculate |Analyse,
which carries out the solution and stores results ready for viewing.
Results
23. The maximum sagging moments can then be obtained by looking at the results
of the envelope in the results viewer. This is opened using the menu item File
|Results.

24. If the graphics and tabular results are not shown on the same screen then
ensure that the Graphics is enabled using the menu item View | Set Default
Layout | Graphic Above Table.
25. Set the Results Type: to Envelope and the Results For: to Beam.
7-7

26. To add the effect of dead load and superimposed dead load to the enveloped
results then use the drop down list in the Include Dead Load Compilations: field
to include both Dead &SDL compilations. (This is located near the top left hand
corner of the graphics window).
27. To determine the maximum value then annotate the graphics using the orange
General button at the right of the graphics screen and tick the Result tick box.
If all results are shown then the Format button can be used to select
maximums only.
Filtering
28. The overall maximum is in span 2 but if we require to determine the maximum
in span 4, the simplest thing to do is to filter the results for span 4
only. This is done by clicking on the graphics filter button

29. First of all De-select all from the Selection Tasks and set the Pick Mode to
Longitudinal Beam. Then click anywhere on the forth span in the graphics
window before closing the Member Selection Filter form with the OK button.
The maximum sagging moment in span 4 is then shown on the graphics.
30. Annotate the member numbers using the orange General button in the
graphics window.
31. Remove columns in the table that have zero values and have no meaning for a
line beam analysis by unticking the selection that appears when clicking on the
first column of the headings row - as shown below:

Click here

32. To see how the graphics and table would be printed out, use the File |Print
Preview menu item to display the print preview. Close the print preview using
the Close button. (When the print preview window is open, a PDF of the

7-8

graphic window can be generated by clicking on the

print preview window).

icon at the top of the

33. Close the results viewer using the File |Close Tabular Results menu item.
34. Save the data file, using File |Save as... with a name of My AU Example
7_1.sam.
35. Close the program.

Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the Analysis modules and demonstrates
the basic principles for assigning properties, defining railway loads compilations and
envelopes and viewing the results.

7-9

7-10

7.2. Portal Frame Loading and Analysis

Subjects Covered:
Wind Load; Differential settlement; Lack of fit loading; Dead loading. Bending
Moment, shear and Axial force diagrams.

Outline
The portal frame model, created in example 6.2, is to be loaded with the following
loads:
1. Dead load of the steel members based upon a weight density of 77kN/m3
2. Dead Load of precast concrete floor panels resulting in a UDL on the beams of
30kN/m
3. A horizontal wind load of 8kN/m acting as a UDL on the left hand columns
4. A support settlement of 20mm applied just to the left hand support
5. A Lack of fit loading due to the top beam being 15mm short during erection

8kN/m Wind Load

30kN/m Slab dead loads

30kN/m Slab dead loads

Create a combination of these loads using load factors of 1.2 for the dead, live and
wind loads. (This is based on using AS/NZS 1170.0:2002).
Produce a combined bending moment/shear force diagram for the two beams, with
max values annotated, and an axial force diagram for the two columns both for the
combined load case.

7-11

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the file created in example 6.2 called Two Span
Single Bay Frame_AU.sst using the menu item File |Open...
2. Click on the menu Data |Titles... and change the Structure Title to Portal
Frame Loading, the sub title to Example 7.2, the Job Number to 7.2 and
enter your initials in the Calculated by: field.
3. Close the Titles form using the OK button.
4. Click on the
button at the bottom of the Navigation window to enable
adding basic loads into the navigation tree.

Dead Loads
5. Click on the + Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Beam Member Load |Beam Element Load from the list of options.
6. We can enter the steel dead load into the first row of the Define Beam Loading
form by setting Load Type to be F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load
Value to be Volume and Load W1 to be -77 (it is negative because it is
acting vertically downward). W2 automatically assumes the same value as it is
a uniform load.
7. Click on the small down arrow next to the filter button
in the graphics
toolbar and select Beams Only from the list of filters (these filters were set up
in example 6.2).
8. Window round the whole structure.
9. Repeat 7 and 8 but with the filter Columns Only. There should be 56
members now loaded as seen in the last column of the table.

10. The second line in the table can now be used to define the slab dead loads
which will be F Uniform, Global Z, Length and -30.
11. This should be applied to just the beams using the Beam Only filter.
12. Change the Name: to Dead Loads and close the Define Beam Loading form
with the OK button.
7-12

Wind Loads
13. The wind load will also be created using Beam Member Loads |Beam
Element Load when Adding a new Basic Load. The parameters for this will
be: F Uniform, Global X, Length and 8. It should be applied to just the
left hand column by using the Columns Only filter but only windowing around
the left half of the structure.

14. Change the Name to Wind Loads before closing the Define Beam Loading
form with the OK button.

Support settlement Load

15. Click on the + Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Support Displacement from the list.
16. Enter -20 in the DZ(mm) column of the first row and then click on the left
supported node in the graphics window.

17. The default Name of Settlement is suitable so close the Define Support
Displacement Loading form with the OK button.

Lack of Fit Load

18. Click on the + Add button at the top of the navigation window and select
Beam Member Load |Beam Element Distortion from the list.

7-13

19. The lack of fit can be applied as a point distortion of -15mm at any point along
the top beam. Enter -0.015 in the D Start column of the first row and then set
Type to Point, Axes to Local, Direction to Direction X.
20. Apply this to the structure by setting the filter to Beams only and then clicking
on left end of the top beam.

21. Set the Name to Lack of fit load and then close the Beam Distortion Load
(Define Beam Loading) form with the OK button.

Compilation
22. To form a combination of these loads we create a Compilation. Click on the
button at the bottom of the navigation window and then click on
the + Add button at the top. Select Other from the list.
23. In the Compile Loading Patterns form change the Name to Combination 1.
Click on the + button near the bottom of the form four times. In the first row of
the Load Name field, click on the arrow at the end and select the L1: Dead
Loads. Set the gamma value to 1.2.
24. Enter each of the loads into separate rows of the table and apply the
appropriate factors as shown below.

25. Close the Compile Loading Patterns form with the OK button.

7-14

Solution
26. Click on the menu item Calculate| Analyse to perform the analysis which will
display a form showing the progress of analysing the four load cases. Before
closing this form display the analysis log file by clicking on the

button.

27. In the text file that is displayed check that the total loads applied in load case
L1 are equal and opposite to the support reactions for the same load case.
(This applies to direct actions and not moments).
28. Close both the log file and the Analysis form.

Results
29. Click on the menu item File |Results to open up the results viewer and then
display this as full screen using the window controls.
30. Use the menu item View | Set Default Layout | Tabbed Layout to set the
view to a tabbed view with the Graphics on one tab and the table on another
(this will not need doing if it is already a tabbed view). Click on the Graphics
tab at the bottom.
31. In the blue control area Set Results Type to Compilation, Name: to
Combination 1, Results For: to Beam.
32. Use the filter dropdown button to select Beams Only.
33. Click twice in the Results For field in the light blue graphics toolbar and in the
dropdown tick both FZ and MY.
34. To produce annotations of the values click on the orange General button on
the right side of the graphics screen, tick Result and then click the Format
button next to it.
35. Set the values to the values shown in the following graphic before closing the
Text Setup form using the OK button.
36. To enhance the scale of the plot click on the orange Results button on the
right side of the graphics screen and tick both scale boxes setting the scale for
shear as 1:50 and that for bending 1:200. (You may want to check that Auto
Redraw is switched on. The Auto Redraw button is located on the light blue
graphics toolbar).

7-15

37. A plot of the axial loads in the columns can be obtained in a similar way except
the filter would be set to Columns Only and the Results For tick box set to
FX only. For this plot it is best to rotate the results text back to 0.0 using the
Text Setup form.

38. Close the Results Viewer using the File |Close Tabular Results menu item.
7-16

39. Save the file using File |Save as... with a name of My AU Example 7_2.sam.
40. Close the program.

Summary
This example explores some of the not so common load types applied to portal
frames and creating a combination of them. The use of filtering is encouraged to
produce graphical and tabular results for just specific parts of the structure and here,
excluding parts, such as stiff dummy members, where results are not relevant.
Sometimes the default scale of results plots is not large (or small) enough to show the
results adequately. This example shows how user defined scales can visually improve
the quality of graphical results.
In results plots that consist of more than one component, (eg. moment and shear)
where results values are displayed, then only one component can be annotated at a
time. The component that is shown is the first one selected when making the
selection in the dropdown list. To change the annotation to another component it is
simply a matter of re-selecting the components in a different order.

7-17

7-18

7.3. Highway Loading and Analysis of a Simple Grillage

Subjects Covered:
Beam Element Loads; Bridge Deck Patch Loads, M1600 Moving Traffic Loads;
Loading Sets; Compilation; Analysis; Analysis log file; Bending Moments; Graphical
Results, Print Preview; Customizing table headers; Sorting tabular results.

Outline
A two span grillage model of a 500mm thick, curved slab, as shown below and as
defined in example 6.4 is to be loaded and analysed for dead, superimposed dead
and AS5100 traffic loading.

It is required to determine the design sagging moment at the centre of span 1 for ULS
combination 1 design case and maximum deflection along the lower edge of the
structure for SLS combination 1. Engineering judgement is to be used to create just
two load patterns to achieve this.
Details of the loading are as follows:

Dead load of the concrete slab is 24kN/m3 (gamma = 1.2 & 1)

Carriageway surfacing is 0.2m thick and has a density of 18kN/m 3 (gamma =

2.0 & 1.3)

Live load type SM1600 loading (gamma = 1.8 & 1.0)

Footway live loading in accordance with clause 7 of AS5100.2 (gamma = 1.8 &
1.0)

The M1600 Truck Loads and pedestrian loads are positioned to give the maximum
bending and deflection load effects.

7-19

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file with a name of AU Example 6_4.sst
which was created in example 6.4. Close the Structure overview with the
Done button.
2. Change the title sub title of the example to Example 7.3 using the Date
|Titles menu option, Change the Job Number: to 7.3 and put your initials in
the Calculations by: field before closing the form in the normal way.

Basic Loads
The dead load of the slab can be created by applying a volume load of
24kN/m3 to just the longitudinal members (applying it to the transverse
members as well would double the actual dead load).
3. Change the navigation pane on the left hand side of the
screen to Basic Loads by selecting the button at the
bottom.
4. Click on the + Add button at the top to display the selection
list as shown and pick Beam Member Load ->Beam Element
Load.
5. In the Define Beam Loading form change the Load Type to
F Uniform, the Direction to Global Z, the Load Value to
Volume and Load W1 to -24. The field Load W2
automatically becomes -24 also as it is a uniform load (note
the units). The Name: field can be changed to Concrete
Dead Loads.

6. To apply this to just the longitudinal beams we need

to filter the graphics window to display just these
beams. Click on the small arrow next to the filter icon
in the graphics toolbar
and pick Longitudinal
Beams from the list.
7. By windowing around the complete structure and changing the viewing
directions to isometric it can be seen that the load has been applied to the
longitudinal beams only.
7-20

8. Close the Define Beam Loading form with the OK button.

9. To define the Carriageway surfacing load, the Bridge Deck Patch Load option
is selected when +Adding a new basic load.

10. Set Define loading by: to object then in the graphics screen click on the 4 lines
bounding the carriageway area (consecutive lines must intersect). The lines are
the carriageway definition lines and the span end lines at either end. It is best
to click on these lines outside the bounds of the structure so as to isolate them
from other lines. The loaded area is then shown hatched. (Ensure that the
Carriageway and Span End Lines boxes are ticked on the orange Objects
button at the right side of the graphics screen. Switching off other objects can
help with defining loads accurately).

11. In the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form set Load per unit area to
3.6kN/m2 and set the Name: to SDL: Carriageway before closing the form
with the OK button. (Note that subsidiary loads can be defined in the
directions other than the main direction on the Bridge Deck Patch Load form.
However, in this example only loads in the main Z direction will be defined).

7-21

12. In the navigation window right mouse click on the load just created above and
select Copy from the drop down list.
13. Set Define loading by: to object (and click Yes on the confirm form that
appears), then in the graphics screen click on the 4 lines bounding the south
most footway area.
14. In the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form set Load per unit area to
7kN/m2 and set the Name: to SDL: footway 1 before closing the form with
the OK button.
15. Repeat steps 12 to 14 but for the north most footway using the Name: SDL:
footway 2.
16. Click on the +Add button in the navigation window and select Vehicle Loads
| Lane Load SM1600/Walkway to open a Define Vehicle Loading form. Set
Ends defined by: to Span and the Lane No: and Span No: to 1. The load
intensity is calculated automatically, from the length of the load, and all other
data can be left as the default so close the form with the OK button.

17. Right mouse click on the SM1600 load in the navigation window and select
Copy from the drop down list. Change the lane to 2 and close the form with the
OK button.
18. Repeat for lanes 3 and 4.
19. Click on the +Add button in the navigation window and select Vehicle Loads
| M1600 Moving Truck Load to open a Define Vehicle Loading form. Set
Position: to within lanes and then position the truck load approximately by
clicking twice in the north most lane somewhere near the centre of span 1. Now
set the Chainage in the form to 3m to position it more accurately. Change the
Name to M1600 Lane 1 at 3m. Close the form with the OK button.

7-22

20. Repeat this for lane 3 with a chainage of -0.5, lane 3 with a chainage of 0.7,
lane 4 with a chainage of -0.5m and lane 4 with a chainage of -0.3m.
21. Click on the +Add button in the navigation window and select Vehicle Loads
| M1600 Moving Truck Load to open a Define Vehicle Loading form. Set
Position: to within lanes and then position the truck load approximately by
clicking twice in the north most lane somewhere near the centre of span 1. Now
set the Using field to bogie 1 centre and set the chainage in the form to 9m
to position it more accurately. Change the Name to M1600 Lane 1 B1 at 9m.
Close the form with the OK. Repeat this procedure for lane 2 with a chainage
of 8.5m and lane 2 with a chainage of 7.6m.
22. The footway loading is applied using standard M1600 UDL loading so follow
step 16 above but use lane 5 for the north most footway and 6 for the south
most footway. The Load per unit area: field shows a UDL which is
automatically calculated by the program in accordance with Figure 7 of
AS5100.2 when Lane Load SM 1600/Walkway has been selected for a footway
lane. Close the form with the OK button. (Remember to apply the footway live
loading to the left hand span, ie. span 1, only).
Loading Sets
23. It is sometimes convenient to group the basic loads into recognisable sets.
This can be done by clicking on the Open Loading Sets... option at the bottom
of the navigation window.

7-23

24. In the Define Loading Sets form click on the green + button at the top right
and then change the Set Name to Dead Loads.
25. Click on the single dead load in the Unassigned Load Cases: list and then click
on the > button to move it into the Selected Load Cases: list
26. Repeat 24 and 25 above with Set Name of SDL and the appropriate load
cases.
27. Repeat 24and 25 above with Set Name of Live Loads and the remaining load
cases. (Note that multiple loads can be selected at once by holding the shift
key down while clicking on the first and last in a series).
28. Close the Define Loading Sets form with the OK button.
Compilations
29. Change the Navigation view to Compilations by clicking the appropriate button
at the bottom of the navigation window.
30. Click on the + Add button to add a Dead Loads at Stage 1 compilation. Click
on the + button near the bottom of the form. In the first row of the compilation
table use the drop down list to select the Concrete Dead Loads case. Note
that the default gamma is correct at 1.2 and change the Name: to DL ULS.
Close the form with the OK button.
31. Repeat 30 above but this time set the Limit State: field to Serviceability ( a
prompt to confirm changing the load factors will appear) and the Name: to DL
SLS.
32. Click on the + Add button to add a Superimposed Dead Loads compilation.
Click on the + button near the bottom of the form three times. In the
7-24

compilation table use the drop down list to select the three SDL load cases.
The default gamma factor for each is 2. Close the form with the OK button.
33. The compilation for SDL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. The factors are changed
by the program to 1.3.
34. Click on the + Add button to add a Traffic Loads AS5100.2 compilation. Click
on the + button near the bottom of the form eight times. This compilation will
be for ULS max sagging so select the vehicle and pedestrian loads as shown
below.

35. Note that the gamma factors are correct at 1.8 but that the ALF associated lane
factor numbers need changing as shown to correctly represent the lane factors.
The Name: of the compilation should be changed to U1 SM1600 Loads Max
Sag Span 1 before closing the form with the OK button.
36. For the SLS Max Deflection Compilation repeat 34 and 35 but change the Limit
State: to Serviceability and include the vehicles and ALF associated lane factor
numbers as shown below. There are 10 rows of data in total so you will need
to click 10 times on the + button. The Name: is set to S1 SM 1600 Max Def
Span 1 before closing the form with the OK button.

7-25

37. The data file can now be saved as AU Example 7_3.sst using the main menu
item File | Save As...
Analysis
38. The load cases can now be solved using the menu Item Calculate |Analyse,
which carries out the solution and stores results ready for viewing. Because
we have defined loading sets an Activate Loading Sets form is displayed
allowing a choice of which loading sets to analyse. Ensure they are all ticked
and then click on the OK button.

39. A warning message will appear informing us that part of one of the vehicles is
missing the deck. This is ok so answer by clicking the Yes to All button.
Once the analysis is complete as indicated on the Analysis form click on the
small icon at the bottom right of this form.

40. This will display the analysis log file which will indicate any warning messages
about the analysis (if any) and give a summary of the analysis degrees of
freedom and the total applied loads and total reactions for each load case.
These should be inspected for consistency.

7-26

41. The analysis log file can then be closed using the green EXIT button on the
top left of the window. The Analysis form can also be closed using the Done
button.
Results
42. The maximum sagging moments can be obtained by looking at the results of
the appropriate live load compilation in the results viewer. This is opened
using the menu item File |Results.
43. If the graphics and tabular results are not shown on the same screen then use
menu item View |Set Default Layout |Graphic Above Table.
44. Set the Results Type: to Compilation and the Results For: to Beam and the
Name of the compilation to U1 SM 1600 Loads Max Sag Span 1.
45. To add the effect of dead load and superimposed dead load to the live
compilation results then use the drop down list in the Include Dead Load
Compilations: field to include both ULS Dead & SDL compilations. Click on the
orange isometric view icon on the graphics toolbar and select My in the
Results for: dropdown menu.
46. To determine the maximum value then annotate the graphics using the orange
General button at the right of the graphics screen and tick the Result tick box.
7-27

If all results are shown then the Format button can be used to select
maximums only. Click on the Auto Redraw button on the graphics toolbar to
show the results. It is worth noting that un-ticking the Transparent box in the
Text Setup form can make it easier to read the results in the graphics window.

47. To see how the graphics and table would be printed out, use the File |Print
Preview menu item to display the print preview. This can be printed if required.
(A PDF can be generated by clicking on the
icon at the top of the print
preview window). Close the print preview using the Close button.
48. To repeat this exercise for the SLS displacements change the compilation
Name to S1 SM 1600 Max Def Span 1, the Results For: to Joint and include
the SLS Dead Load Compilations in a similar way as before.
49. To ensure that you are looking at z displacements click on any number in the
DZ column in the table.
50. Before printing a Print Preview of these results remove columns from the table
that are all zeros (DX, DY, RZ). This is done by right mouse clicking on each
column header and selecting Remove This Column from the drop down menu
displayed. These can be reinstated if required by clicking on the column
control icon at the far left of the column headers and ticking the appropriate
boxes.

7-28

51. To determine which node number gives the min result we can sort the results in
ascending order for a particular column and then look at the result at the top of
the table. For the vertical displacements, this is done by left clicking on the DZ
column header until the sort arrow points upwards and then scrolling to the top
of the table.

52. Close the results viewer using the File |Close Tabular Results menu item.
53. Save the data file, using the menu File |Save As... to a file called My AU
Example 7_3.sst
54. Close the program.

Summary
This example provides a basic introduction to the basic loading and results of a bridge
deck grillage analysis.
Although maximum results are normally obtained using the load optimisation features
in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014, to position vehicle patterns accurately, it
is important for the engineer to be able to create loading patterns manually based on
engineering experience. By understanding this process, the engineer will be
confident in checking the results produced automatically by the load optimisation,
which is described in Chapter 10 of this manual.
Some key features of this example are:

7-29

The copying of data items to create additional data items and then modifying
them (such as loads).

Understanding Vehicle loading.

Creating load compilations for different limit states.

Grouping of loads to form loading sets. These should not be confused with
compilations, as the loads or effects are not summed but merely grouped for
convenience. Each group can be analysed separately and will not require
re-analysis if other groups are subsequently solved (as long as other data
hasnt changed.

The production of an analysis log file (the last log file produced is always
available from the File | Analysis Log File... menu). This file easily gives the
ability to check that the total applied loads are equal and opposite to the
resultant total support reactions. It is important to do this at least once for
every structural model, as differences in these values are an indication of an illconditioned stiffness matrix and that structure stiffness should be scrutinized.

To show the ability to customise and be selective on printed output.

7-30

7.4. Dead Load & Diff Temp Load on a Finite Element Slab
Subjects Covered:
Dead loads in FE; Differential temperature in an FE Slab; The use of composite
members to represent FE results; FE results with discontinuities in slab thickness;
Principle moment vectors

Outline
Consider the finite element slab, as described and modelled in example 6.5 which has
variable thickness and a curved profile in plan.

It is required to establish the distribution of load to the supports due to its own self
weight and to examine the load path by considering principle moment vector plots.
The load will be based on a weight density of reinforced concrete of 24kN/m 3.
It is also required to consider the effects of an applied temperature profile through the
thickness of the slab, in accordance with AS5100 2 17.3, with respect to the
secondary moment created. Only positive differential temperature will be considered
and it is assumed that a surface thickness of 50mm or less will be applied.
The temperature load will be applied as a combination of a temperature gradient load
and a general temperature rise. The values of these two components will be different
for the variable thickness of slab. For the purpose of this example we will only
consider the main slab of 500mm and the cantilever slab of 300mm. The effects on
the column head will be assumed to be that of the 500mm slab.
The two values of temperature required here can be calculated from first principles
M
F
using the expressions T g
for temperature gradients and T m
for
EI
EA
membrane temperature. E is the elastic modulus of the concrete (35kN/mm2), I and A
are the moment of inertia and the area of a 1m section of the slab and is the
coefficient of thermal expansion (1.1E-5).
M and F are the restraining Moments and Forces obtained when applying the
temperature profile to a 1m wide section of the slab. These can be obtained by
7-31

carrying out a simple diff temp analysis (using the program) of 1m wide sections of the
two thicknesses of slab, by following the procedure in example 3.3. The results of this
and a section property analysis are as follows:
500mm thick slab
I = 1.0417E10mm4
M = 127.22kNm
Tg = 31.67o/m
300mm thick slab
I = 0.225E10mm4
M = 43.35kNm
Tg = 50.04o/m

A = 5.0E5mm2
F = 1551.5kN
Tm = 8.05o

giving

A = 3.0E5mm2
F = 1267.61kN
Tm = 10.97o

giving

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file with a name of AU Example 6_5.sst
which was created in example 6.5. Close the Structure Overview with the
Done button.
2. Change the title sub title of the example to Example 7.4 using the Data
|Titles menu option, Change the Job Number: to 7.4 and put your initials in
the Calculations by: field before closing the form in the normal way.

Dead Load
3. Click on
at the bottom of the navigation window and then click on
at the top of the window and select Finite Element Load |External
Load from the dropdown list.

4. In the first row of the table in the Define Finite Element Loading form set Load
Type to Force/volume, Direction to Global Z and Load to -24.
5. Window around the complete structure in the graphics window to select all the
elements. It doesnt matter that they have different thicknesses as the load
applied is a volume load.
6. Set Name: to Concrete Dead Loads before closing the form with the OK
button.
7-32

Temperature Load
7. Click on
at the top of the window and select Finite Element Load
|Temperature Load from the dropdown list.

8. In the first row of the table in the Define Finite Element Loading form set
Temperature Type to Gradient and Grad to 31.67. The default Coefficient is
correct.
9. This temperature gradient needs to be applied to the 500mm and 700mm thick
slab. To do this click on the filter button in the graphics window toolbar, click
on the De-select all Selection Tasks, and then set Select By: to Section
Property. Move the 500mm and 700mm slab properties into the Selected
Groups: field using the > button and then close the Member Selection Filter
form with the OK button.
10. Window round the complete structure in the graphics window to select these
elements.
11. In the second row of the table set Temperature Type to Membrane and TBottom to 8.05, then window round the complete filtered structure again to
apply this to the 500mm and 700mm thick elements.
12. In the third row of the table set Temperature Type to Gradient and Gradient to
50.04. This time the 300mm thick elements must be selected.
13. Use the filter tools in the same way as 9 above to filter the 300mm thick
elements only and then window round the entire structure.
14. In the fourth row of the table set Temperature Type to Membrane and TBottom to 10.97 then window round the complete filtered structure again to
apply this to the 300mm thick elements.
15. Change the load case Name: to Diff Temp Loads before closing the loading
form with the OK button.

Analysis
16. Use the menu item Calculate |Analyse... to perform the analysis and then
click on the Analysis log file icon
on the Analysis form to open the log file.
7-33

17. Check in the displayed text file that the total load applied is equal and opposite
to the total reaction for the Dead Load case. Note that the total reaction for the
Thermal load case, L2, is zero (or very close to zero) because temperature
loads are internal loads.

18. Close the log file then close the Analysis form with the Done button.

Results Dead Load Case

19. Use the main menu File |Results... to open the results viewer. Set the view to
be combined graphic and table, as shown below, by using the menu items
View | Set Default Layout | Graphic Above Table. Adjust window size to suit
by holding the left mouse button down on the dividing line between the
graphics and table and dragging to a new position.
20. In the dark blue area at the top of the window (Results Controller) set Results
For: to Joint, Name: to L1: Concrete Dead Loads and Effect: to Support
Reactions.
21. In the graphics toolbar, the Results For: field should be set to FZ
22. Change the viewing direction to isometric by clicking on the Graphics toolbar
icon
and then annotate the results using the orange General Button on the
right of the graphics window. Use the Format button next to the Results tick
box and ensure Display All values is selected and SOP: is set to Result
before closing the Format (Text Setup) window with the OK button. You may
need to click on the Auto Redraw button on the graphics toolbar to show the
results.
7-34

Hold left mouse button

down on this line and
drag to adjust window
size
23. The distribution of dead load to the supports can be clearly seen.
To display how this load gets to the supports we can view the moment load
path by plotting the principal bending results.
24. Change the results annotation to Maximums only and then set the fields in the
Results Controller to those shown below. The Results For: field in the graphics
toolbar should be set to Principal Values Maximum to show a faded contour
plot together with two lines at the centroid of the element indicating the relative
magnitude and direction of the principal moments.

25. Red lines represent hogging moments and blue lines represent sagging.

7-35

26. To graphically represent the bending moment in the longitudinal direction, for
the dead load case, the Results Controller fields need to be set as shown
below and the Results For: field in the graphics toolbar should be set to
Bending Triad x.

27. The view shown here has been changed to a Tabbed view (using the View)
menu) and the viewing direction set to plan view. There are two significant
points to note here.
i. The x moment values are per m width and represent bending in
the local xz plane. For this structure the default local x axis is the
same as the global X axis. If we wanted to change this such that
the local x axis was in the direction of the deck centre line we
would need to change them by adding an Advanced FE Set
|Local Axes item to the Structure Navigation Window to align
them to the design line. The load cases would need resolving
before viewing the results.
ii. The Location: field in the results controller is set to Node rather
than centroid or nodal averaged results so that the discontinuity
along the boundary between the two slab thicknesses is
represented
28. Close the Results viewer.

Results Differential Temperature Load Case

29. The secondary moment results caused by the differential temperature case are
best displayed as bending moments on a virtual beam strip, the width of two
narrow elements, passing over the lower of the midspan supports. The results
are to be integrated over the width of this beam strip. To do this in Autodesk
Structural Bridge Design 2014 we use the concept of a composite member.
7-36

30. To define this composite member we click on the menu item Calculate |Define
Composite Member...
31. The elements that make up the composite member are then selected
graphically by first setting the Pick Mode: to Finite Element and then clicking
on the elements one by one as shown below.
32. The Composite axis is defined by setting the Pick Mode: to Node and then
clicking on the nodes, one by one, along the centre of the virtual beam from
one end to the other.

33. Close the Define Composite Member form with the OK button.
34. Open the Results viewer and set the fields in the dark blue Results Controller
area to those shown below. The viewing direction has been set to a south
elevation.

7-37

35. This now shows the bending results of a beam strip 1.25m wide with its centre
line along the composite member axis.
36. The results are obtained by integrating the FE results across the beam strip
and resolving them at each of the axis points. There are three integration/
resolving algorithms that can be used, Method 1, 2 or 3 and it is up to the user
as to which is the most suitable. The method is selected in the results
controller. The basic suitability criteria can be displayed by clicking on the
small, circular ? button next to the Method radio buttons.
37. In our case method 2 has been selected as most suitable. If in doubt, use the
most conservative approach.

38. Shear results can be displayed in exactly the same way.

39. Close the results viewer.
7-38

40. Use the main menu File |Save As... to save the data file with a name of My
AU Example 7_4.sst.
41. Close the program.

Summary
A simple example to show how secondary effects due to differential temperature can
be represented in a Finite Elements model and how to best display results where
there are discontinuities. The representation of FE results in the form of a virtual
beam strip is also demonstrated.

7-39

7-40

8. Transfer of Data
Contents
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.

Line Beam Integration ................................................................................................ 8-3

Prestress Beam Grillage Integration .......................................................................... 8-9
Defining Section Library with DWG File ................................................................... 8-19
Defining Grillage with DXF File ................................................................................ 8-23
Defining a Box Girder with DXF File ........................................................................ 8-27

8-1

8-2

8.1. Line Beam Integration

Subjects Covered:
3 span line beam; Import steel composite beam; Dead and SDL load optimisation;
Transfer results to beam module; AASHTO Distribution factors

Outline
In this example we are going to create a 3 span line beam with outer spans of 21m
and an internal span of 30m. The line beam is constructed from 3 prestress beams
which form a continuous structure. The concrete is then poured in two stages.

We will alter the prestress I girder file that has been supplied to define the section
properties for the model and create a line beam structure. We will then carry out a
load optimisation for dead, SDL and live loadings. When this has been completed we
will transfer the load effects into the beam files making use of the direct link between
the structure and beam files in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014.

Define Additional Prestress Beam

1. Start the program and open the supplied data file called AU Prestress I Girder
Ex 8_1 9_3 9_5.sam.
2. Use the Data |Titles menu option to set the Beam Title to Prestress Beam
Span 30m and set the sub-title to Example 8.1. Also set the Job Number: to
8.1 and put your initials in the Calculations by: field. Click OK to close the
form.
3. Use the menu item Data |Define Beam to open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Definition form.
4. Change the Beam Length to a value of 30 and click OK to close the form.
5. Click on the File|Save As... menu item and enter the filename My AU
Prestress Beam Span 30m.sst. Click on the Save button to save the file.

Procedure
6. Ensure that the current Project Template: is set to Version 6 Examples - AU
using the Options |Project Templates menu item
7. Begin a new structure using the menu item File |New |Structure.
8-3

8. Use the menu item Data |Structure Type |Line Beam to start a line beam
analysis.
9. Set the title to 3 Span Line Beam with a sub title of Example 8.1 using the
Data |Titles menu option. Also set the Job Number: to 8.1 and put your
initials in the Calculations by: field. Click OK to close the form.

Create line beam geometry

10. We now need to define the geometry of the line beam.
Click on the Structure Geometry icon to open the Line Beam Geometry form.
Set the Number of Spans to 3. Click in the Span Length column on row 1 of
the table on the form and enter 21m for the length of the first span. Repeat
this for the third span. Leave the support conditions at their default values and
change the Divide Shortest Span into field to 21. The Divide Longest Span
into field will automatically update to 30. Leave it set to this value. Click OK
to close the form.

Define Section Properties

11. Having defined the geometry of the line beam we now need to define the
section properties.
Click on the Section Properties tab in the tree view (within the Navigation
Window), then click on the Add toolbar button and select Prestress Beam
from the menu. This will open the Import file form. Click on the Browse
button and open the data file Prestress Beam Span 30m.sam which was
created in the steps above. Change Description to 30m Mid Span Beam, then
click on the centre span on the graphics to assign the beam. Click OK to
close the form.
12. We now need to assign properties to the first and third spans.
Right click on S1: 30m Mid Span Beam in the tree and select Copy from the
popup menu. When the Import file form opens, click on the Browse button
then select the file AU Prestress I Girder Ex 8_1 9_3 9_5.sam which has
been supplied. Change Description to 21m End Span Beam then click on the
right hand span on the graphics to assign the beam.
Click on the left hand span and then click OK to close the form.

8-4

Load Optimisation
13. The next step is to carry out a load optimisation on the line beam.
Click on the Data|Automated Loading... menu item to open the Automated
Loadings form. Ensure that only the M1600 tickbox is ticked and then click on
the Analyse button. The graphics window will update to show the shear force
and bending moment diagrams for the resultant loads.

Once the load optimisation has been performed it is possible to see the
influence lines that were used to generate the live loads. Click in the Display
Options field and select Influence Line for Moment. Use the arrows to the
right of the field to move the point of influence along the beam. If you stop at
point 38 you will see the following influence line:

The plot includes dotted lines to indicate that the influence line is cusped.
14. Next we will generate dead and SDL loadings using the load optimisation.
Click on the Dead and SDL Loading tab. Set the Continuous from Stage field
to Stage 1A Concrete and change the value of SDL Intensity to 3.5kN/m.
Make sure Analyse for Diff. Temp. and Analyse for Shrinkage are not ticked.
Click on the Analyse button to carry out the load optimisation. When it has
completed, the graphics will show the bending moments and shear forces that
were created.

8-5

The Included Dead Loads tick boxes can be used to see the effects of dead
load at each stage of construction.

Transfer Results
15. Once the loads have been generated, the next step is to transfer them into the
two beam files.
To do this, click on the Transfer Beam Load... button. This opens the Select
Beam form. Click on the middle span on the graphics window to select the
beam file into which we want to transfer the results. The beam will be
highlighted in red and the details shown in the Select Beam form.

Click OK to open the Assign Load Cases form. This form is used to match
the load cases in the line beam with the design load cases in the beam file.
Click in the Design Load Case column to select the required design load case
in the beam file then click in the Automated Load Results column and select
the loading you want to transfer into that load case. When you have finished
the form should look like this:

8-6

NB: There is no Construction Stage 3 loading because there are no differential

temperature loads being considered.
16. The next step is to calculate the transverse distribution factors.
To do this, click on the AASHTO D.F. Wizard... button. This will open the
Distribution Factors Wizard form. The program calculates the distribution
factors for live loads in accordance with Article 4.6.2.2.2 of the AASHTO LRFD
Specifications. This is because there is no form of guidance in Australian
Standards for the calculation of these values.
The program makes a best guess at the values in the form, based upon the
beam data. In this case we need to update some of the fields. Change No. of
Beams to 10. Also, change Width of Carriageway to 10m and Angle of Deck
Skew to 17. Length for DFM ve needs to be set to 25.5m, the average of
the two span lengths. The default setting of K for Table 4.6.2.2.1-1 Cross
Section is the most appropriate for the type of precast beams defined in this
example.

After each of these values is entered, the DFM values will automatically
update. When you have entered all the values, click OK to close the form.
17. The Assign Load Cases form will now display the DFM values. Click on the
Transfer to Beam Module button to transfer the loads. The program will now
transfer the loads to the beam file My AU Prestress Beam Span 30m.sst.
Click on OK. The program will display the following warning:

8-7

Click on the Yes button to ensure that the shear forces are consistent
between dead and live load cases.
18. Click on the File|Save... menu item to save the beam file and then click on the
Data|Define Loading... menu to open the Define Composite Beam Loads
form.
Click on the Interface button to open the Interface form. Select Line Beam
Analysis and click OK to return to the line beam model.
Click on the Data|Automated Loading... menu item. Select the Dead and
SDL Loading tab and click on the Analyse button. Then click on the Live
Load Envelope tab and click on the Analyse button if the Results button is
greyed-out. Click on the Transfer Beam Load... button. Click on the right
hand span of the line beam to select the second beam file. The program
displays the following warning:

Click OK then click on OK on the Select Beam form. Click on the AASHTO
D.F. Wizard... button. This will open the Distribution Factors Wizard form.
The values will all be correct so click on the OK button.
19. Click on the Transfer to Beam Module... button.
Click on OK to close the Define Composite Beam Loads form, once again
clicking on the Yes button on the Confirm message. Click on the
File|Save... menu item to save the beam file.
20. Click on the Data|Define Loading... menu to open the Define Composite
Beam Loads form. Click on the Interface button to open the Interface form.
Select Line Beam Analysis and click OK to return to the line beam model.
21. Click on the File|Save As... menu item and enter the filename My AU
Example 8_1.sst. Click on the Save button to save the file.
22. Close the program.

Summary
In this example we created a 3 span line beam and assigned section properties to it,
using a prestress beam file created in an earlier example. We then used the load
optimisation to create Dead, SDL and Live loads. These loads were then transferred
to the beam design, using the AASHTO Distribution Factor Wizard to calculate
distribution factors based on the geometry of the structure.

8-8

8.2. Prestress Beam Grillage Integration

Subjects Covered:
Transfer of results from grillage analysis model to prestressed beam file

Outline

In this example we are going to follow a procedure for transferring results from the
analysis module to the prestressed beam module using SLD files.
We are going to use the automated load optimisation to create live loads for a 2 span
prestressed concrete beam bridge. The loads will be created for what are usually the
most critical positions along a prestressed concrete beam in a 2 span structure such
as this. The load effects and positions are as follows:
-

Sagging bending moment at mid-span

Hogging bending moment at the intermediate support

Vertical shear at a distance of a quarter of the span from left hand support

Vertical shear at a distance of a quarter of the span from right hand support

Vertical shear at the node adjacent to left hand support

Vertical shear at the node adjacent to right hand support

After analysing the load cases, we will save the results in 3 SLD files (one file for each
of the 3 inner beams in the left hand span of the deck see below). We will then
import the SLD files into the prestressed beam file. The prestressed beam file will be
saved for each SLD file imported to create 3 beam files in which design checks could
be done. A fourth pre-prepared SLD file containing dead load and temperature load
effects has been created in the line beam module and will also be imported into the
prestressed beam file. Because the 3 inner beams are identical and the deck is only
skewed to a slight extent, it is likely that the dead and temperature effects will be
similar in each of the 3 inner beams. Both spans are 21m from support centre lines
which are slightly skewed.

8-9

The deck has 3 inner beams, 2 outer beams and edge parapet sections.

Procedure
Define Live Loads
1. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file AU Example 8_2
Grillage.sst.
2. Set the sub title to Grillage with Live Loads using the Date | Titles menu
option and put your initials in the Calculations by: field.
3. We will now create some influence surfaces and generate live load patterns
using the load optimisation in the program. The first step is to define the
influence surfaces we want to generate.
Click on the Data | Influence Surface menu item to open the Influence
Surface Generation form. Set Pick Mode to Beam Element then click on the
beam element indicated below in the left-hand span in the graphics window.
Set the Start/End field to End. This will define an influence surface for My
Sagging for the beam element.

Define the other influence surfaces for the other load effects and locations as
described in the introduction to the example. When complete the Influence
Surface Generation form will have 18 rows as shown below:
8-10

4. The next step is to analyse the structure and generate the influence surfaces.
Set Generate by to Reciprocal and click on the Analyse button. A progress
box will open. Click on the Done button when the analysis has completed.
The graphics window will now show the influence surface for the first member
selected.
5. Next we will compile the loading patterns for the influence surfaces we have
just generated.
Set Type to AS5100.2 Road then click on the Run Optimisation button to
open the Road Load Optimisation... form. Use the Limit States tick boxes to
create loads for Ultimate and Serviceability. Ensure that the tickboxes for
W80, A160, M1600 and S1600 are ticked. Ensure that the Scope field is
set to Both to ensure both sagging and hogging moments are generated.
Click on the Compile Loading Patterns button to run the load optimisation.

8-11

Click on OK on the load optimisation and influence surface generation forms

to save the loads that have been created.
6. Details of the load optimisation run will be shown together with the loads
created both on the form and in the graphics window.
7. Next we will solve the load cases.
Go to the Calculate menu and select Analyse.... The Activate Loading Sets
form will open. This allows you to select which loading sets you want to solve.
Each time the load optimisation is run, a loading set is automatically generated
for the load cases produced by that run. The list also includes any load cases
not included in a loading set. Make sure all tick boxes are ticked and click
OK.

8-12

The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Click Yes
to All on any Confirm form that may appear. Once the analysis has completed,
click on the Done button.
8. Save the structure as My AU Example 8_2 Live Loads.sst.
9. We will now save the results from the analysis in a SLD file.
Click on the Calculate|Design Load Effects|Select Beam menu item to open
the Select Beam form. Go to the graphics window and click on the beam just
below the centre of the deck in the left-hand span (Beam 1). It will be
highlighted in red. Click on the OK button to open the Assign Load Cases
form.
10. We will match compilations produced during the load optimisation with design
load cases.
Fill in the form as shown below. The ULS factor will need setting to zero on
several rows because these rows are for serviceability compilations. Also,
adjust the I.D. number in the Index column on some rows of the table as shown
below. This will ensure that both ultimate and serviceability limit state results for
each loadcase are identified by a single I.D. number when the results are
imported into the beam module. The Assign Load Cases form for Beam 1 will
have 12 rows and will look like this:

8-13

11. Click on the Export Loads to File... button and save the SLD file as AU
Example 8_2 Beam 1.sld.
12. We will now create an SLD file for the live loads effects at the beam elements
at the beam at the centre of span 1 (Beam 2). This is done by following a
similar procedure as outlined in the steps above. Remember to clear the
previous selections on the Assign Load Cases form before filling in the form for
this beam.
Following this, an SLD file for the live loads effects at the beam elements at the
beam just above the centre of span 1 (Beam 3) is created. Remember to
clear the previous selections on the Assign Load Cases form before filling in
the form for this beam.
Import Loads in Prestressed Beam
13. When the 3 SLD files have been created we can import them into the
prestressed beam file.
Open the pre-prepared data file AU Example 8_2 Inner Beam.sam.
14. Use the menu item Data|Define Loading... to open the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form.
15. Click on the Interface button. Select the Direct ASCII File Import radio button
and click OK. Select the pre-prepared file entitled AU Example 8_2 DL and
Temp.sld.
8-14

This has imported the dead, superimposed dead and temperature effects
defined in the line beam module.

16. Click on the Interface button again. Select the Direct ASCII File Import radio
button and click OK. Select the SLD file entitled AU Example 8_2 Beam
1.sld. This will import the live load effects for Beam 1. The imported load
effects can be seen by selecting, for example, Live load BM in the Loading
Description field. Different compilations for this type of loading can be seen by
selecting their respective I.D. numbers in the I.D. field on the form. These I.D.
numbers match the I.D. numbers in the Index column of the Assign Load
Cases form. Take note of, and close, any Confirm forms that may appear.

8-15

17. Click OK to close the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form. Click Yes on
the Confirm form if it appears.

18. Save the beam file as My AU Example 8_2 Beam 1 Loads.sam.

19. The load effects for the Beam 2 will now be imported.
Use menu item Data|Define Loading... to open the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form.
20. Click on the Interface button again. Select the Direct ASCII File Import radio
button and click OK. Select the SLD file entitled AU Example 8_2 Beam
2.sld. This will import the live load effects for the relevant beam and will
automatically overwrite the live load effects imported from the previous SLD
file.
21. Click OK to close the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form. Take note of,
and close, any Confirm forms that may appear.
22. Save the beam file as My AU Example 8_2 Beam 2 Loads.sam.
23. The load effects for Beam 3 will now be imported.
Use menu item Data|Define Loading... to open the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form.
24. Click on the Interface button again. Select the Direct ASCII File Import radio
button and click OK. Select the SLD file entitled AU Example 8_2 Beam
3.sld. Again, this will import the live load effects for the relevant beam and will
automatically overwrite the live load effects imported from the previous SLD
file.
25. Click OK to close the Define Pre-tensioned Beam Loads form. Take note of,
and close, any Confirm forms that may appear.
26. Save the beam file as My AU Example 8_2 Beam 3 Loads.sam.
27. Close the program.
Summary
In this example live loads were generated using the live load optimisation in the
analysis module. The load effects for 3 longitudinal beams were saved as individual
SLD files. These 3 live load SLD files and a fourth pre-prepared SLD file were then
imported into the prestressed beam module file. The imported load effects were saved
8-16

in the beam module file to create 3 beam files, each containing live load effect results
pertaining to 3 individual longitudinal beams in the deck of the grillage. Design checks
could be performed in each of the 3 beam files created. For more information about
design checks in the prestressed beam module see AU Example 5.1.
Alternative working methods are available to the user as regards the transfer of
results from the analysis module to the beam module. For instance, in the above
example the user could choose to not save the beam file after each SLD file has been
imported and thus avoid generating multiple beam files. The user may choose to do
this in cases where frequent adjustments to the beam file are anticipated and the user
wishes to avoid having to make identical adjustments in each beam file. Another
alternative method would be to transfer load effects directly from the analysis module
to the beam module in cases where the user believes it is suitable to do so. This is
done by clicking on the Transfer to Beam Module... button on the Assign Load
Cases form. See Chapter 10 of this manual for further information about this.

8-17

8-18

8.3. Defining Section Library with DWG File

Subjects Covered:
Importing DWG files into the program to define sections; User defined library shapes;
User defined SXF files

Outline
The section file below is one of six sections in a section library. The section library
and the six SXF files which contain data pertaining to the tendons and reinforcement
in the six sections are all created by importing data from a single DWG file which has
been prepared in Autodesk AutoCAD. The single drawing file contains data about
each individual section on separate layers. This is essential to the process of
importing data from a DWG file.

Below is the drawing containing all six sections. Note that Autodesk Structural Bridge
Design 2014 will recognise a circle of less than 100mm diameter as a reinforcing bar
and assign the diameter of the bar as per the diameter in the DWG file when data
from the drawing is imported into the program. The program will recognise a cross of
less than 100mm height and width as a tendon when data from the drawing file is
imported.

The sections, reinforcing bars and crosses representing the tendons were created in
AutoCAD using standard elements such as straight lines and polylines. Note that the
section outline has to have a closed perimeter in order for it to be imported into the
program.

8-19

Procedure
1. Start the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options | Projects Templates menu
item.
2. Begin a new section using the menu item File | New Section.
3. Use the menu item Data |Titles... to set the title as W Beam Section with a
sub-title of Example 8.3. Also add your initials to the Calculated by data item.
Click on OK to close the Titles form.
4. Open the Define Material Properties data form using the menu item
Data|Define Material Properties... Delete the structural steel by clicking twice
in the name field and then using the delete key.
5. We will import the section data for the Beam W7 from the DWG file into the
program.
Open the Import File form using the menu item File | Import File... . Navigate
to the supplied file called W Beam Sections.dwg and open it.
6. Untick all tickboxes except the tickbox for layer W7 on the Import Shapes
form which has appeared on the screen. Ensure that Drawing Units are set to
metres and click the Next button. The data in the DWG file has now been
imported.

7. Open the Define Section... form from the Data|Define Section menu item.
Click on the Fit View icon
if the section is not shown clearly in the graphics
window.
8. This will display the general define shape in the graphics window. In the first
row of the Library column re-select Define Shape to open the Define Element
Shape form.
8-20

9. Change the Name on the Define Element Shape form to W Beam W7 then
click on the Add button to add it to a library file. This will open a file browser
form which will allow you to choose an existing library file, if it exists, or to
create a new one. We will create a new one by entering a library file name of
W Beams Precast.lib and then clicking on the save button.
10. Close the Define Element Shape data form using the OK button.
11. Assign a material property from the Property column drop down list as the
grade 32 concrete. Click on OK to close the Define Section form.
12. Open the Define Bars and Tendons form from the Data|Define Bars menu
item.
13. Note that when Draw bars is selected in the Generate field the bar size is
correctly shown in the Diam (mm) field. The program will detect the bar size
provided that the circle in the dwg file is less than 100mm in diameter.
14. We will now input data for the tendon force and area. Note that the user must
manually calculate the prestress force after all losses have occurred when
entering tendon force data in the section module. Default values for the tendon
area and force are generated by the program, but can be overwritten by the
user.
Select Draw tendons in the Generate field. Note that the values in the Area
and Force fields are just default values and need overwriting. The user must
define values in these fields. Click on the Edit Tendons button and box
around the whole section to open the Edit Reinforcement form. Set the Edit
Option field to Change tendon area, set the Strand area to a value of
143mm2 and No of Strands to 1. Click OK to close the Edit Reinforcement
form. Click on the Edit Tendons button and box around the whole section to
open the Edit Reinforcement form again. Set the Edit Option field to Change
force and set the Tendon Force field to 186kN. Click OK to close the Edit
Reinforcement form.

15. The data for the bars and tendons will now be saved in a SXF file.
Click on the Data Export button. Enter a name of Bars and Tendons W7.sxf
and click on the save button.
8-21

16. Click OK to close the Define Bars and Tendons form.

17. The section file can be saved at this point by selecting the menu item
File|Save as... and saving the section file with an appropriate name.
18. Section data for the next section (Beam W8) can be added to the section
library and an SXF file generated for the bar and tendon data by selecting the
menu item File|New Section, clicking Yes on the Confirm form and following
the steps as outlined above. Remember to select only the tickbox for layer W8
on the Import Shapes form.
19. When all 6 sections have been saved in the section library and six SXF files
have been generated close the program.

Summary
This method enables users to create user libraries of sections from data that has been
pre-prepared in, and imported from, AutoCAD. This may be useful when considering
sections that are not available in the default Concrete Beam and Steel Section
libraries provided in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014. SXF files are also
created to store data pertaining to reinforcement and tendons. Alternatively of course,
section files can be defined directly in the program as described in the examples in
Chapter 2 of this manual.
Note that after a section has been defined with data imported from a DWG file it may
be necessary to re-assign the material properties for the reinforcement and tendons
before analysing the section.

8-22

8.4. Defining Grillage with DXF File

Subjects Covered:
Preparing DXF files for grillages; Importing DXF files to define grillages

Outline
The grillage for the skew deck structure below would be easy to define directly in
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014. However, in this example an alternative
method for defining such geometry in AutoCAD is outlined. A DXF file has been
prepared in AutoCAD using a set of specialised commands which are loaded into the
program.

Below is the drawing containing the geometric data for the grillage beam elements.
Note that Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014 will recognise only elements
defined using either the specialised commands, or manually drawn 3D line entities, as
beam elements when data from the DXF file is imported into the program.

Below is an outline of the preliminary steps that were followed to create the supplied
DXF file in AutoCAD. Note that in these steps commands that are typed into AutoCAD
are in blue for clarity in this document. Subsequent steps will describe the procedure
for importing the DXF file into Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014 in order to
define a grillage.

8-23

Defining a DXF File of a Grillage

1. To use AutoCAD in this example an SBD-CAD menu needs to be inserted into
the default menu. A file called sbdcad.mnu (and sbdcad.mnl) is supplied
with the program to enable this and should be installed in accordance with
AutoCAD instructions.
In addition, AutoCAD must be able to locate the sbd setup.lsp file as an
external reference and the appropriate environment variable (eg. XREF) should
be set to include the path to this file.
2. Open AutoCAD.
3. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Setup | Define Drawing Limits. Click once in
the drawing area and type in the coordinates of the bottom left and then top
right of the drawing limits. This defines the drawing limits.
4. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Structure Layers | Define New Layer and type
in a suitable layer name (eg. DECK) and colour (eg. RED). This defines the
layer on which the 2D deck members will be defined.
5. The members for the deck grillage will now be defined.
Select menu item SBD-CAD | Beams | Single Beam and type in the
coordinates of the start and end of a single longitudinal beam.
6. Use the Array tool to create an array of longitudinal beams.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to create an array for the transverse beams.
8. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Write DXF File and save the DXF file with an
appropriate name. Enter a value of 6 for decimal places of accuracy as per the
prompt.
9. Save the DWG file and close AutoCAD.

Importing the DXF File to Create a Grillage

Below are steps describing how data is imported into Autodesk Structural
Bridge Design 2014 from a DXF file to define a grillage.
1. Open the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options | Projects Templates menu
item.
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File | New Structure.
3. Use the menu item Data | Titles... to set the title as Grillage with DXF File
with a sub-title of Example 8.4. Also add your initials to the Calculated by
data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
8-24

4. Click on the Import Model

icon at the top of the Navigation Pane to open
the Import Model form. Select the Bridge Structure radio button. This will
ensure that all members in the Z=0.0 plane are automatically assigned as deck
members when the data is imported into the program. Click on the Browse
button and open the supplied DXF file with a name of grillage.dxf. Click on the
Next button.
5. Untick the tickbox for layer 0 so that only the tickbox for layer DECK is
ticked. Click on the Next button.

6. Tick the tickbox for Split intersecting beam elements so that both available
tickboxes are ticked. Ensure that the One linear drawing unit... field is set to
metre and click on the Next button. This will ensure that the grillage is split
into individual beam elements and that the grillage will be at the correct scale.

7. When the data has been imported click OK to close the Import Model form.
8. The Member Details form will open automatically. Note that the tickboxes in the
Deck Mem column are ticked automatically, indicating that the imported beam
elements are in the deck. Hence, these beam elements will be considered as
8-25

deck members in the calculation of influence surfaces and the application of

loads. Delete the 8 members at each end of the structure that are not required
(highlighted in red below). These beam elements are deleted because they are
outside of the skewed ends of the deck. Click OK to close the Member Details
form.

9. The structure file can be saved at this point by selecting the menu item
File|Save as... and saving the structure file with an appropriate name.
10. Additional data for the Design Lines, Carriageways, Section Properties etc. can
be defined to complete the structure file. See examples 6.4 and 10.1 for
information on defining grillage structure files. For example, the individual
beam elements in the longitudinal direction could be defined as being in
longitudinal beams on the Longitudinal Beams form.

Summary
This method enables users to import data from a DXF file to define a beam element
grillage. Such a method of working can be useful when the complex geometry of a
bridge deck has been defined in a drawing file. It is worth noting that design lines can
be imported from DXF files by using the Import button on the Define Design Line
form.

8-26

8.5. Defining a Box Girder with DXF File

Subjects Covered:
Preparing DXF files for finite element structures; Importing DXF files into the program
to define finite element structures; Design Line; Carriageway definition; Local axes;
FE properties

Outline
The box girder bridge below has a slab thickness of 200mm and a bottom flange
thickness of 275mm. The thickness of the webs is 250mm. The structure is modelled
using 3D shell finite elements. The geometry of the structure is complicated with the
slab (curved on plan) and sloping webs of the box girders. A structure with such
geometry would be difficult to define directly in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design
2014. However, such geometry is relatively easy to define in AutoCAD. Hence, a DXF
file has been prepared in AutoCAD using a set of specialised commands which are
loaded into the program. The DXF file will be imported into to Autodesk Structural
Bridge Design 2014 to define the geometry of the structure.

Below is the drawing containing the geometric data for the finite elements. Note that
Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014 will recognise only elements defined using
either the specialised commands, or individually drawn 3D FACE entities, as finite
elements when data from the DXF file is imported into the program.

Below is an outline of the preliminary steps that can be followed to create a DXF file in
AutoCAD for a simple finite element mesh. Note that in these steps commands that
are typed into AutoCAD are in blue for clarity in this document.

8-27

Defining a DXF File of an FE Model

1. To use AutoCAD in this example a SBD-CAD menu needs to be inserted into
the default menu. A file called sbdcad.mnu (and sbdcad.mnl) is supplied
with the program to enable this and should be installed.
In addition, AutoCAD must be able to locate the sbdsetup.lsp file as an
external reference and the appropriate environment variable (eg. XREF) should
be set to include the path to this file.
2. Open AutoCAD.
3. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Setup | Define Drawing Limits. Click once in
the drawing area and type in the coordinates of the bottom left and then top
right of the drawing limits. This has defined the drawing limits.
4. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Const lines | Single Line or Arc and draw the
four lines which form the boundary of the deck.
5. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Const lines | Mesh and type in the number of
divisions on the bottom edge and the vertical right hand edge of the structure.
Click on the 4 edges of the boundary line starting with the bottom edge and
working around the edge of the structure in an anti-clockwise direction. This
divides the deck along the lines that define the mesh.
6. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Structure Layers | Define New Layer and type
in a suitable layer name (eg. SLAB) and color (eg. RED). This defines the layer
on which the deck members will be defined.
7. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Elements | From Mesh and click on the mesh.
The mesh will turn red. This has split the mesh into the individual elements.
8. Select menu item SBD-CAD | Write DXF File and save the DXF file with an
appropriate name. Enter a value of 6 for decimal places of accuracy as per the
prompt.
9. Save the DWG file and close AutoCAD.

Importing a DXF File to Create an FE Mesh

Below are steps describing how data is imported into Autodesk Structural
Bridge Design 2014 from a DXF file to define a finite element model.
1. Open the program and ensure that the current Project Template: is set to
Version 6 Examples - AU using the Options | Projects Templates menu
item.
2. Begin a new structure using the menu item File | New Structure.

8-28

3. Use the menu item Data | Titles... to set the title as Box Girder with DXF File
with a sub-title of Example 8.5. Also add your initials to the Calculated by
data item. Click on OK to close the titles form.
4. Click on the Import Model
icon at the top of the Navigation Pane to open
the Import Model form. Select the Bridge Structure radio button. This will
ensure that all members in the Z=0.0 plane are automatically assigned as deck
members when the data is imported into the program. Click on the Browse
button and open the supplied DXF file with a name of BoxGirder.dxf. Click on
the Next button.
5. Untick the tickbox for layer 0. The tickboxes for all other layers are ticked.
Click on the Next button.

6. Tick the tickbox for Split intersecting beam elements so that both available
tickboxes are ticked. This will ensure that the mesh is split into individual
elements. Ensure that the One linear drawing unit... field is set to metre and
click on the Next button.

7. When the data has been imported click OK to close the Import Model form.
8. The Member Details form will open automatically. By scrolling down the table
on the form we can see that the tickboxes in the Deck Mem column are ticked
8-29

automatically for those finite elements that form the deck. Hence, these finite
elements will be considered as deck members in the calculation of influence
surfaces and the application of loads. Click OK to close the Member Details
form.

Defining the Carriageway and Span End Lines

9. We will define a design line which will be used to align the carriageway.
Select the Structure tab in the tree view. Click on the Add button and select
Design line to open the Define Design Line form. Click the + button. Select
the Arc radio button and click the Next button. Select the 3 points on curve
radio button and click the Next button. Set the Snap field at the top of the
graphics window to Intersection and select 3 points along the centre of the
deck in the graphics window by clicking on the point at the left hand end of the
deck, a point near the centre of the span and then at the right hand end of the
deck. Click Next and OK to close the forms.

10. Next we will define the carriageway that will run over the structure.
Click on the Add button and select Carriageway from the dropdown menu to
open the Define Carriageway form and set the fields to the selections and
values shown below. (Note that the traffic flow direction is indicated by a
triangular arrow head in each notional lane and clicking on each of the arrows
until they are double-headed will show that traffic can flow in either direction.
However, in this example we will leave the lanes as single direction). Click
OK to close the Define Carriageway form.

11. The next step is to define the location of the span end lines.

8-30

Click on the Structure node in the Navigation window, click on the Add button
and select Span End Lines to open the Define Span End Lines form. Click on
the bottom left and top left-hand corners of the structure on the graphics
window. This will draw a heavy black line. Repeat this for the right-hand
abutment to define the span end lines. Click OK to close the form.

Defining Supports
12. Next we will define the 6 support nodes for the structure. The supports will be
defined such that the 4 outer supports will be resisting vertical loads only. The
support node at the centre of the left hand end of the structure will be fixed in
the radial and tangential direction. The support node at the centre of the right
hand end of the structure will be fixed in the radial direction and free in the
tangential direction. It is recommended that the user takes note of the
orientation of the local axes of the support nodes when interpreting support
reaction results.
Click on the Structure node in the Navigation Window, click on the Add button
and select Supported Nodes. Ensure that the Select: field is set to All Joints
and select the 3 nodes at the left hand end of the structure as shown below. In
the first row of the support table, change the support conditions so that only the
DZ direction is fixed. Change Group Type to Variable then click on the middle
of the 3 nodes (node 32). Change the support conditions for this node so that
it is also fixed in DX and DY.

13. The orientation of the supports will be altered such that the local y axis is
tangential and the local x axis is radial.
Click on the + button next to the Support Constraints about field to open the
Define Support Local Axes sub-form. Click on the bottom right support node
(node 59) then on the bottom left support node (node 96). Note that the angle
in the Beta field has changed to 101.4212 degrees. Click OK to close the subform.

8-31

14. Change Name to Left Supports and click OK to close the Define Supported
Nodes form.

15. The support nodes at the right hand end of the structure will now be defined.
Click on the Add button and select Supported Nodes again. Select the 3
nodes at the right hand end of the structure as shown below. In the first row of
the support table, change the support conditions so that only the DZ direction is
fixed. Change Group Type to Variable then click on the middle of the 3 nodes
(node 42). Change the support conditions for this node so that it is also fixed in
DX.

8-32

16. The orientation of the supports will be altered such that the local y axis is
tangential and the local x axis is radial.
Click on the + button next to the Support Constraints about field to open the
Define Support Local Axes sub-form. Click on the bottom left support node
(node 51) then on the bottom right support node (node 81). Note that the angle
in the Beta field has changed to 78.5788 degrees. Click OK to close the subform.

17. Change Name to Right Supports and click OK to close the Define Supported
Nodes form.

Properties
There are three properties to define
i. The 250mm thick isotropic FE property for webs.
ii. The 200mm thick isotropic FE property for slab.
iii. The 275mm thick isotropic FE property for bottom
flange.
18. We first change the Structure navigation window to Section Property by clicking
on the Section Properties button at the bottom of the window.
19. Click on the +Add button at the top of the navigation window and select Finite
Element.

8-33

20. In the Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness: to 250 and the
Elastic Modulus: to 35. Note that the Shear Modulus gets automatically
updated based upon the default Poissons ratio of 0.2. Change the Name to
a suitable description.
21. Click on the Filter toolbar button and select WEBS. Note that sub model
groups were automatically created for each of the layers in the imported DXF
file. Box around the whole structure to assign the section property to the webs.
Click OK to close the form.
22. Assign the section properties for the other sub model groups by following a
similar procedure. When all of the section properties have been assigned
select Select All to turn the filter off.
23. The structure file can be saved at this point by selecting the menu item
File|Save as... and saving the file with an appropriate name.
24. Additional data for the Basic Loads etc. can be defined to complete the
structure file. See examples 6.5 and 7.4 for further information on defining
finite element structure files.

Summary
This method enables users to import data from a DXF file to define a finite element
box girder structure in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014. The supports are
assigned to the structure and adjusted to suit the layout of the structure. Section
properties are also assigned to the structure. Note that a composite member could be
created within the finite element analysis model. See example 7.4 for information
about this.

8-34

9. Specialist Analysis Techniques

Contents
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.

Reinforcement Design Moments in a Finite Element Slab ......................................... 9-3

Dynamics Normal Modes Analysis Simple Footbridge ......................................... 9-9
Staged Construction - For Grillages ......................................................................... 9-15
Non-Linear Analysis Flat Slab Bridge Deck .......................................................... 9-43
Offset Beams For Finite Element Decks ............................................................... 9-57
3 Sided FE Structure with Soil & Hydrostatic Pressure Loads ................................ 9-71
User Defined Vehicles & Convoys ........................................................................... 9-91

9-1

9-2

9.1. Reinforcement Design Moments in a Finite Element Slab

Subjects Covered:
Creating new sub models; moving elements from one sub model to another;
Reinforcement sets; Moment triads; Design Moments.

Outline
Consider the finite element slab, as described and modelled in example 6.5 and
loaded in example 7.4

It is required to establish the design moments; hogging and sagging; main &
secondary, in a given reinforcement direction in various parts of the slab due to dead
load only. The design moments will be based on the Wood Armer equations.
The idealised reinforcement directions in the various components of the slab are as
shown below.

For hogging, the main reinforcement is parallel to a line joining the deck centre points
at each end.

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file with a name of AU Example 7_4.sst
which was created in example 7.4. Close the Structure overview with the
Done button.

9-3

2. Change the title sub title of the example to Example 9.1 using the Date
|Titles menu option. Change the Job Number: to 9.1 and put your initials in
the Calculations by: field before closing the form in the normal way.

New Design Line

3. Click on
at the top of the navigation window and select Design Line
from the dropdown list.
4. Set the Snap: mode in the graphics toolbar to Intersection and then click on
the node at the centre of each end of the structure. (You may need to zoom in
on the graphics window to do this).

5. Set Name to Secant of CL and then close the Define Design Line form with
the OK button.

New Sub Models

For different reinforcement calculations to be carried out independently for
different slab thicknesses it is necessary to have a different submodel for each
slab thickness.
It is therefore necessary to create two new sub models (in the same plane and
with the same origin as the existing sub model) and move the appropriate
elements from one to another.
6. Click on
at the top of the navigation window and select 2D Sub model
(GCS , Z=0) from the dropdown list.
7. Rename this submodel to 300 slab by right mouse clicking on the submodel
entry in the navigation window and choosing Rename from the options

Moving elements between Sub Models

8. Within the 2D Model A sub model, in the navigation tree, click on Sub Model
Members.
To place the 300 thick elements into the appropriate sub model we first need to
select and then move them.
9-4

9. In the graphics window toolbar click on the filter button and then in the Member
Selection Filter form click on De-select All. Then set Select By: to Section
Property.
10. Move the 300mm property into the Selected Groups: by selecting it then
clicking on the > button. Close the filter form with the OK button.
11. Select all the displayed elements in the graphics window by windowing around
the whole structure.
12. In the Define Sub Model Members table click on Move to Sub Model... in
Member Tasks then select the 300 slab sub model before closing the Sub
Models form with the OK button.
13. Close the Define Sub Model Members form with the OK button.
14. Repeat steps 6 to 12 for the 700 slab. You will need to click on Structure at
the top of the tree so that the Add+ button is displayed again. After doing this,
Rename the 2D Model A sub model as 500 slab. Finally, use the drop down
arrow next to the filter button in the graphics window to turn off the filter (Select
All).

Analysis
The reinforcement moment calculations are principally post processing of load
case results, so the analysis of the already defined load cases can now be carried
out.
.
15. Use the menu item Calculate |Analyse... to perform the analysis.

16. Close the Analysis form with the Done button once the analysis is complete.

Defining the reinforcement sets

17. One or more reinforcement sets now need to be defined for each sub model.
18. In the navigation window, right mouse click on the 500mm Slab sub model and
select Add |Reinforcement Set.

9-5

19. In the Define Reinforcement Set form change the Name: to 500 sag, click on
the curved design line in the graphics window, select just Sagging in the Face
tick box and lastly tick the Results for: Design tick box. The reinforcement
direction can be seen in the graphics display.

20. Close the Defined Reinforcement Set form with the OK button.
21. Repeat 18 to 19 to create a second reinforcement set in the same sub model.
This time it is named 500 Hog, the straight design line is selected and
Hogging and Design are both ticked.
22. To skew the secondary reinforcement so that it is parallel to the lines of the
supports change Pick: to Secondary Reinforcement Direction and then click
on any two nodes on the right hand span end line.
23. Close the Defined Reinforcement Set form with the OK button. There will
then be two reinforcement sets in the 500 Slab Sub Model.

9-6

24. Repeat 18 to 23 for the 300 slab sub model with exactly the same
reinforcement sets data as the 500 Slab, but of course use appropriate names.
25. Repeat 18 to 19 for the 700 slab sub model but this time both Hogging and
Sagging reinforcement are in the same direction and are both ticked. The
reinforcement direction data for this case is the same as for the 500 Hog set.
Set the name for this set to 700 Hog & Sag.

Results
26. Use the main menu File |Results... to open the results viewer. Set the view to
be combined graphic and table, as shown below, by using the menu items
View | Set Default Layout | Graphic Above Table. Adjust window size to suit
by holding the left mouse button down on the dividing line between the
graphics and table and dragging to a new position.
27. In the dark blue area at the top of the window (Results Controller) set Results
For: to Reinforcement Moments, Name: to L1: Concrete Dead Loads and
set: to RS1: 500 Sag.
28. In the graphics toolbar, the Results For: field should be set to Design
Sagging Main.
29. Change the viewing direction to plan by clicking on the Graphics toolbar icon
and click on the Auto Redraw button if the graphics are not automatically
updated.

9-7

Hold left mouse button

down on this line and drag
to adjust window size

30. All the other reinforcement sets and components can be displayed and printed
in a similar way.
31. Close the results viewer.
32. Use the main menu File |Save As... to save the data file with a name of My
AU Example 9_1.sst.
33. Close the program.

Summary
This example illustrates that if reinforcement moments are to be created for different
components of a structure, then each component should be in a separate sub model,
and that results can be obtained separately for each component. This will mean that
discontinuities, occurring at the boundaries of different thickness slabs, are correctly
allowed for.
Although in this example we have only considered one load case, the results for
compilations and envelopes are also available.
It should be pointed out that the results for compilations are not obtained by simply
summing the reinforcement moment results for each constituent load case. This
would be incorrect as the Wood Armer equations are not a linear set of equations.
They are calculated by summing the component moment triad results and then
performing the Wood Armer calculations on the resultant moment triad.
In this example we have only considered the calculation of Design Moment. It should
be noted that there are an equivalent set of equations (Denton Burgoyne) which can
be used for assessing the adequacy of a known set of reinforcement. This will be
covered in a separate example.

9-8

9.2. Dynamics Normal Modes Analysis Simple Footbridge

Subjects Covered:
Steel Footbridge; Normal Modes; Natural Frequencies; Mode Shapes; Participation
Factors; Sturm Sequence Checks; Structural Mass; Density; Lumped Mass;
Dynamic Compilations; Animation

Outline
Many structures have dynamic characteristics which are undesirable and, if not
checked, would fail to meet certain design requirements. Footbridges are structures
which are often susceptible to dynamic problems caused by wind or simply by
pedestrians using the structure. These vibrations can sometimes be excessive and
although they may not cause any structural failure, they may cause discomfort and
alarm to any user of the bridge.
It is therefore generally required to check that undamped natural frequencies of
footbridges do not fall within a specified range.
In the following example, the vibration modes of a tubular steel footbridge, as
described and modelled in example 6.3, are to be examined.

It is required to establish the undamped natural frequencies and mode shapes of:
The fundamental vertical bending mode
The fundamental horizontal bending mode
The first torsional mode.
It is also required to establish how many vibration modes there are below 45Hz and if
all these modes are considered, what percentage of mass participation is achieved in
the vertical and transverse horizontal directions.
The total mass acting on the structure is made up from the structural mass of the
structure members all having a weight density of 77.0kN/m3 and some non-structural
mass, due to surface finishing of the deck, of 0.7kN/m 2.

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the data file with a name of AU Example 6_3.sst
which was created in example 6.3. Close the Structure overview with the
Done button.

9-9

2. Change the Title sub title of the example to Example 9.2 using the Date
|Titles menu option, Change the Job Number: to 9.2 and put your initials in
the Calculations by: field before closing the form in the normal way.

Structural Mass
To check the structural mass applied to the structure we can look at a data
report to inspect the densities applied to each member.
3. Click on the Menu item File |Data Reports to open the Data Reports form.
Scroll to the bottom of the form and tick to include Section Property Data then
click on the View button.
4. Inspect the density of each of the properties. You will notice that they are all
77kN/m3 except the 75x75 angle which is set to 78kN/m3.
5. Close the Results viewer with the green EXIT button and then the Data
Reports form with the Done button.
6. As this is a parametric shape, the density is input in the property definition
form, so this could be changed here but in this example we will show how to be
more specific in changing densities for individual members/elements.
7. Change the Navigation window to Section Properties by clicking on the
appropriate button at the bottom.
8. Click on
at the top of the navigation window and select Advanced
Beam Properties |Modified Density from the dropdown list.
9. Change Name: to be Angle Modified and the Density: to 77. Now click on
the 10 diagonal bracing members in the deck to assign them.

10. Close the Specify Beam Density form with the OK button.

Structural Mass
The surfacing mass of 0.7 kN/m2 is to be added as Lumped mass on the nodes
of the bottom boom. The deck is 55m long and 3.5 m wide so the added
weight is 134.75kN. This will be applied to the 22 nodes in the deck, with the
two end nodes at each end having half the mass of the others. This works out
to 6.74kN (0.687Tonnes) on internal nodes and 3.37kN (0.344Tonnes) on the
end nodes.
9-10

11. Change the Navigation window to Basic Loads by clicking on the appropriate
button at the bottom.
12. Click on
at the top of the navigation window and select Lumped Mass
from the dropdown list.
13. In the first row set mX mY and mZ to be all 0.687 and then click on each of
the 18 inner nodes in the deck.
14. In the second row set mX mY and mZ to be all 0.344 and then click on each
of the 4 end nodes in the deck.

15. Change Name: to be Surfacing Mass and then close the form with the OK
button.
16. To enable the addition of this into the structural mass we need to create a
dynamic compilation with this mass in it. Change the Navigation window to
Compilations by clicking on the appropriate button at the bottom.
17. Click on
at the top of the navigation window and select Dynamic from
the dropdown list.
18. Click on the + button at the bottom of the form to add a row to the table. In
the first row of the table we select the Surfacing Mass. The default value for
the Factor is 1.0 and this is correct but change the Name to With Added Mass
before closing the form with the OK button.

9-11

Analysis
19. Click on the menu item Calculate |Dynamic Analysis... to open the Dynamic
Analysis Control form.
20. Set the Compilation for Dynamic Analysis: data field to C1: With Added Mass.
21. The first analysis is a Sturm Sequence Check which checks the number of
modes below a given frequency. Check that this option is selected on the data
form and enter a frequency of 45.

22. Click on the Analyse button. Click OK on the warning message which
appears regarding very thin walled sections.

23. When the analysis is complete click on the Log File icon on the Analysis form
to open up the log file. This should report that there are 41 modes below 45
Hz.

9-12

24. Close the Analysis Log File with the green EXIT button and the Analysis form
with the Done button.
25. On the Dynamics Analysis Control form (which should still be open) select the
Modal Analysis for: radio button and set the data field to 41 Modes.
26. Click on the Analyse button. (The software may take a few seconds to
perform the analysis).
27. When the analysis is complete, close the Dynamic Analysis Control form with
the OK button and open the Results Viewer using the Menu item File
|Results....
28. In the dark blue Results Control area tick the Show Participation Factors tick
box to display the following table

29. The percentage mass participation (at the bottom of the table) shows 94%
vertically and almost 100% laterally.
30. On inspection of the displacement participation factors for each of the first few
modes, it is clear that the first vertical deflection mode is mode 2 and the first
lateral deflection mode is mode 1.
31. These mode shapes can be visually checked by un-ticking the Show
Participation Factors tick box, setting Effect to Deflected Shape and clicking
on the Auto Redraw button on the graphics toolbar. Each mode can then be
selected in the Mode Shape: data field and the mode shape will be displayed.
32. It may be easier to interpret the shapes if they are viewed in animation by using
the controls in the graphics toolbar
. It is clear that mode 3 is
the first torsional mode.
9-13

33. Close the Results Viewer.

34. Use the main menu File |Save As... to save the data file with a name of My
AU Example 9_2.sst.
35. Close the program.

Summary
This example shows the very basics of carrying out a normal modes analysis using a
structural model. It does not give any assistance in creating models specifically for
dynamic analysis where an understanding of dynamic behaviour is required.
This is essentially a very simple model as all the structural material is the same and
has the same density. When composite beams are used where there is a mixture of
materials and densities, then a transformed density will be required. If composite
beams created by the program are used in the analysis then this transformed density
is calculated automatically.

9-14

9.3. Staged Construction - For Grillages

Subjects Covered:
Prestress Beam; Grillage Model; Carriageway Definition; Setting Out Lines;
Construction Lines; Rotate Mesh; Define Construction Stages; Basic Loads; Dead
Load Compilations; Transfer Results to .sld File; Recommended Outline Procedure for
Staged Construction

Outline

In this example we are going to model a 2 span prestress beam bridge with a
concrete slab. The bridge has 14 longitudinal beams as shown in the diagram below.
Transverse diaphragms are located at the two end abutments and the intermediate
supports. There is continuity between the two spans when the diaphragm and 6 metre
width of stitching slab at the intermediate supports becomes active. Each of the three
diaphragms is 1 metre wide.

The data for the beams is created by making alterations to a design beam file
supplied. We will also define a section file and a grillage model. These properties will
be assigned to the members in the grillage and the construction stages will be
defined. The beams will be I-Girder Type 3 prestress beams. The slab thickness is
200mm.
9-15

To define construction stages for grillages it is not just a case of making various beam
elements active or inactive at each stage, but it is necessary to change section
properties to reflect whether a particular section is composite or prestress beam only.
The prestress beam only properties will be defined by the design sections and the
composite properties by the design beam.
There will be 5 construction stages as follows:
Stage 1 Prestress beams only
Stage 2 Prestress beams with wet concrete at end diaphragms & spans 1 & 2
Stage 3 - Active end diaphragms & slab at spans 1 & 2 and wet concrete at
6 metre wide stitching slab and diaphragm at intermediate supports
Stage 4 Active diaphragm at intermediate supports & wet concrete upstand
Stage 5 - Edge upstand sections active to complete the structure

We will apply dead and superimposed dead loads manually. The Define Construction
Stage Loading form will be used to assign these loads to the construction stages.
After analysing the load cases, we will then transfer them to a .sld file. The notes in
the summary at the end of the example will describe an outline procedure for
9-16

completing the analysis and design of a structure in which construction stages have
been defined.

Procedure
Creating the prestress beam file
1. Note that as an alternative to following steps 1 to 8 the supplied file AU
Example 9_3 Beam and Slab.sam can be used. Start the program and open
the data file AU Prestress I Girder Ex 8_1 9_3 9_5.sam supplied.
2. Open the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Prestress Beam and Slab
with a sub-title of Example 9.3. Set the Job Number to 9.3. Also add your
initials to the Calculated by data item. Click OK to close the form.
3. Open the Pre-tensioned Beam Definition data form using the menu item Data|
Define Beam. Set Cross section is: to varying.
4. Open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form by selecting Section 1
from the drop down list in the Define field. On the third row of the table set the
Component field to In situ regular to open the Define Precast Beam
Component sub-form. Set the width and depth fields to 1000mm and 2mm
respectively and click OK to close the sub-form. Set Stage to Stage 2 in the
third row of the table. This Stage 2 concrete component of the beam is only
defined to provide a construction stage to which load effects can be assigned
when results are transferred from the analysis model. Click OK to close the
form.

5. Open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form by selecting Section 2

from the drop down list in the Define field. Set Stage to Stage 1B in the
second row of the table. On the third row of the table set the Component field
to In situ regular to open the Define Precast Beam Component sub-form.
9-17

Set the width and depth fields to 1000mm and 2mm respectively and click
OK to close the sub-form. Set Stage to Stage 2 in the third row of the table.
Click OK to close the form.

6. Open the Beam Feature Definition form by selecting Section Locations from
the drop down list in the Define field. Fill out the data as shown below in the
data form. Click OK to close the data form.

7. Click OK to close the Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form. It is worth noting

that the torsion grid in the pre-prepared beam file had been refined in order to
ensure that when the grillage will analyse when the beam is assigned.
8. Save the file as My AU Example 9_3 Beam and Slab.sam.

Creating the prestress beam section file

9. Note that as an alternative to following steps 9 to 15 the supplied file AU
Example 9_3 Beam Only.sam can be used. Open the data file AU Prestress I
Girder Ex 8_1 9_3 9_5.sam supplied.
10. Use the menu item Calculate|Analyse to open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Analysis form. Select the menu item Data|Beam Type|Transfer to section
analysis. Click No on the warning message and click Yes on the Confirm
form.
11. Use the menu item Data|Titles... to set the title as Prestress Beam Section
with a sub-title of Example 9.3. Set the Job Number to 9.3. Also add your
initials to the Calculated by data item. Click OK to close the form.
12. Open the Section Definition data form using the menu item Data| Define
Section...
9-18

13. Delete the slab section by clicking in the Library field of the second row and
using the delete key.

14. Click OK to close the form. Click No on confirm form.

15. Save the file as My AU Example 9_3 Beam Only.sam.

Creating the structure layout

16. Note that as an alternative to following steps 16 to 26 the supplied file AU
Example 9_3 Mesh and Supports.sam can be used. We start by defining the
alignments and outline of our structure.
Create a new structure using the menu item File|New|Structure. Set the
correct analysis type using the menu item Data|Structure Type|Refined
Analysis.
17. Next we will add some descriptions to the structure which will be shown on all
printed output.
Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to Prestress Beam
Bridge Deck with a sub-title of Section 9.3. Add your initials in the
Calculations by: field.
18. The next step is to define the alignment of the structure.
Click on the Add button at the top of the Navigation Pane and select Design
Line from the drop down menu. This will open the Define Design Line form.
Click on the green plus button at the bottom left of the form to add a new
segment to the design line. On the Define Line Segment form select the Line
option then click on the Next button twice. Enter (0, 7) for the coordinates of
point 1 and (42, 7) for the coordinates of point 2. Click on the Next button
and then click OK to define the design line. Click OK to close the Define
Design Line form.
19. Next we will define the carriageway that will run over the structure.
9-19

Click on the Add button and select Carriageway from the drop down menu to
open the Define Carriageway form. Click on the Design Line field and select
DL1: Design Line from the drop down list. Set Carriageway Type to Single
and enter the following coordinates in the Offset A/B fields:
(-6.8, -5), (-5, 5), (5, 6.8).

The number of notional lanes will be automatically updated. The notional lanes
are shown in the graphics window with the traffic flow direction indicated by an
arrow. Click on each of the arrows until they are shown as double-headed.
This shows that traffic can flow in either direction along each lane. Click on the
OK button to close the Define Carriageway form.

20. Next we need to add a sub-model to the structure.

Click on the Add button and select 2D Sub Model (GCS, Z=0) from the drop
down menu. This creates a new sub-model node in the tree within the
Navigation Pane.

21. Next we will describe the edges of the structure and lines along each abutment
and pier using setting out objects and construction lines.
Click on the first node in the sub-model as shown above and click on the Add
button again. The menu list has changed to list objects that can be added to a
9-20

sub-model. Select Setting Out Objects to open the Define Setting Out Object
form. Click on the Insert Line Segment button at the bottom left of the form
(this is the small + button). Set the Type to Line then click on the Next
button twice. Enter (0, 0) and (0, 14) for the coordinates of the start and finish
of the line, then click Next. Click OK to close the Define Line Segment form
and click OK again to close the Define Setting Out Object form.
Click on the Add button again and select Construction Lines to open the
Define Construction Lines form. On the left hand side of the form there is a list
of line types. Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table.
Click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop
down list. Give the line an offset of 7m and press Enter on the keyboard.
Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a new row to the table. Click in
the DL/SOL Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop down list
and give it an offset of -7m. This has defined construction lines along the top
and bottom edges of the structure.
Click on Offset E/W of DL/SOL then click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select
SO1: Setting Out Object from the drop down list. Give it an offset of 21m.
Repeat this process to add a line at 42m. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Construction Lines form. The graphics window will now show an outline
of the structure as shown below:

22. Click on the File|Save menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_3 Layout.sst.

Defining the mesh and supports

23. We will now begin to define the grillage geometry. The first step is to define
the locations of the span ends.
Click on the Structure node in the Navigation Pane then click on the Add
button. Select Span End Lines from the drop down menu. This will open the
Define Span End Lines form.

9-21

Click on the bottom left and top left hand corners of the left-hand abutment on
the graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this
to locate the piers and second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in
the table as above and on the graphics as below:

Click on OK to close the Define Span End Lines form.

24. The next step is to define the two meshes which make up the grillage.
Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane and then click on the Add
button. Select Mesh from the drop down menu. This will open the Define
Mesh form. Set Name to Span 1 and set Mesh Type to Orthogonal to span.
Click on the four edges of the left hand span, starting with the bottom edge and
then set Longitudinal to 16 and Transverse to 14. (You may need to press
Enter on the keyboard in order for the numerical data to be input properly
before clicking in the graphics window).
We will rotate the mesh at span 1 to ensure that the beams have the correct
orientation when they are assigned. Click on the Rotate Mesh button twice to
reverse the direction of the longitudinal members of the mesh. Set the
Longitudinal Spacing to set spacing to open the Set Longitudinal Spacing
form. Set the spacing factor to 0.5 on the first and last rows of the table. Click
OK to close the form. Set the Transverse Spacing to set spacing to open
the Set Transverse Spacing form. Set the spacing factor to 0.5 on the first
and last rows then set the Dimension to 3 on the second row. The table will
be as shown below. Click OK to close the form. Click OK to close the Define
Mesh form.

9-22

Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane again and click on the Add
button. Select Mesh to open the Define Mesh form. Click on the Copy Mesh
Details From button and select M1: Span 1 (2D Model A) from the drop down
list. Change Name to Span 2 and then click on the four edges of the right
hand span, starting with the bottom edge. Click OK to close the Define Mesh
form.

25. Next we will define which nodes in the structure are supported.
Click on the Structure node at the top of the tree and then click on the Add
button and select Supported Nodes from the drop down menu. This will open
the Define Supported Nodes form. Click on the Select drop down menu in the
graphics window and set it to Along Span End Lines, then draw a box around
the nodes shown below. In the first row of the support table, change the
support conditions so that only the DZ direction is fixed.
Change Group Type to Variable, which allows each support to have different
constraints applied. Click on the node just above the centre of the left abutment
(node 126). Change the support conditions for this node so that it is also fixed
in DX and DY. Click on the node just above the centre of the right abutment
(node 328) and change the support conditions so it is also fixed in the DY
direction. Click on OK to close the form.

9-23

26. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_3 Mesh and Supports.sst.

Assigning section properties

27. We will now assign section properties to our grillage, starting with the inner
beams.
Open the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button and select Prestress Design Beam from the drop down menu. This will
open the Import file form. Click on the Browse button and open the file AU
Example 9_3 Beam and Slab.sam created earlier. Click on the Beam Section
Reference... drop down menu and set it to origin, which ensures that the
beam will be imported at such a height that the support is at the soffit, rather
than the centroid, of the beam.
Change Description to Inner Beam and click on the 14 inner beams in each of
the 2 spans of the structure. They will be highlighted in red as shown below
and their references added to the Assigned Beams list. Click on OK to close
the form. (You may need to move the bottom of the graphics window upwards
in order to be able to see the form).

28. Next we will assign properties to the edge upstands using parametric shapes.
Click on the Add button again and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
down menu. This will open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Change
Description to Edge Section and set Width and Depth to 500mm. Leave the
other properties at their default concrete values. Ensure that the Select field at
the top of the graphics view is set to Inclusive Box. Select the two rows of
edge members in the structure using the mouse to draw a selection box around
each of them. Click on OK to close the form
9-24

29. Next we will assign properties to the transverse slab members using a
continuous slab property.
Click on the Add button again and select Continuous Slab from the drop down
menu. This will open the Continuous Slab Properties form. Change Depth to
200mm and Description to Transverse Slab. Leave the other properties at
their default concrete values. Click on the Member selection filter drop down
menu and select Transverse Beams. Box around the whole structure and
click on OK to close the form.

30. Finally we will assign properties to the transverse diaphragms using a

parametric shape property.
Click on the Add button again and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
down menu. This will open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Change
Width to 1000, Depth to 1330 and Description to Diaphragm. Leave the
other properties at their default concrete values. Click on the Member selection
filter drop down menu and select Transverse Beams. Box around the three
diaphragms and click on the Yes to all button as necessary. Click on OK to
close the form.

9-25

31. Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add button and
select Advanced Beam Set|Eccentricities from the drop down menu. This will
open the Define Beam Eccentricities form. Click on the small green + button
then set the Start Z field on the first row to a value of 1230 and press return
on the keyboard. Box around only the continuous slab members in span 1 and
span 2 separately to select the transverse slab members as shown below.

Selection 1

Selection 2

Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Longitudinal
Beams. Box around the edge upstands to select them. Click on the + button
to add a second row then set the Start Z field on the second row to a value of
665 and press return on the keyboard. Click on the Member selection filter
drop down and select Transverse Beams. Box around the three diaphragms
to select them. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select
Select All to remove the filter. Click on OK to close the form. The advanced
model view icon
can be used to check that the eccentricities have been
applied correctly.
32. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_3 Section Properties.sst.

Define the construction stages

33. First of all we will create three stages, with all members active and then we will
alter the first stage to contain just the longitudinal beam members (not the edge
upstands) and a nominal transverse connecting member between them at the
locations of the three diaphragms.
Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on Open Construction
Stages... near bottom of the Navigation Pane to open the Construction Stages
form. Ensure that the Select dropdowns at the top of the graphics window are
set to Make Inactive and Inclusive Box. Click on Insert Before twice to
create a total of three rows on the table. Ensure that the top row of the table is
highlighted. Click on the Member selection filter drop down menu and select
Transverse Beams. Box around the left span of the structure and then the
right, such that the members at the three transverse diaphragms are not
selected (see below).

9-26

34. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to
remove the filter. Select the two rows of edge members in the structure using
the mouse to draw a selection box around each of them.
35. Click on Insert After to create a new row for Stage 2 which will be identical to
stage 1.
36. We will now create a new stage after stage 2 so that we can add the concrete
slab at spans 1 and 2 as active members.
Ensure that the second row of the table is highlighted and click on Insert After
again to create a new row for Stage 3. Ensure that the third row of the table is
highlighted and use the Construction Stage dropdown at the top of the
Navigation Pane to select Stage 3: Construction. Use the Select dropdown at
the top of the graphics window to select Make Active. Box around the areas
of the left and right spans where the stitching slab is not present as shown
below:

37. We will make the edge upstand members inactive at both spans.
Use the Select dropdown at the top of the graphics window to select Make
Inactive. Box around the members at the top and bottom edges of the
structure. Click OK to close the form and click OK on the Information
message that appears.
38. The prestress section file will be assigned to the longitudinal beams for
construction stages 1 and 2, because the prestress beams are the only active
members at these stages.
Use the Construction Stage dropdown at the top of the Navigation Pane to
select Stage 1: Construction. Open the Section Properties tab on the
Navigation Pane. Click on the Add button and select Design Section Data
from the drop down menu to open the Import file form. Use the Select
9-27

dropdown to select Create. Click on the Browse button and open the file
My AU Example 9_3 Beam Only.sam created earlier. Click on the Beam
Section Reference... drop down menu and set it to origin. Change Description
to Inner Beam Only. Click on the Member selection filter drop down menu and
select Longitudinal Beams. Box around the members of the 14 inner beams
along the full length of the structure. Click on the Yes to All button on the
Confirm form and click on OK to close the Import file form.
39. We will assign a nominal section property to the three transverse diaphragms.
Click on the Member selection filter drop down menu and select Transverse
Beams. Click on the Add button and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
down menu. This will open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Change
Description to Nominal and set Width and Depth to 10mm. Change the
Elastic Modulus, Shear Modulus and Density fields to a value of 1. Ensure
that the Select field at the top of the graphics view is set to Inclusive Box.
Select the members at the three transverse diaphragms using the mouse to
draw a selection box around them. Click on the Yes to All button on the
Confirm form and click on OK to close the form. Click on the Member
selection filter drop down and select Select All to remove the filter.
40. Repeat steps 38 and 39 with the Construction Stage drop down at the top of
the Navigation pane set to Stage 2: Construction. (Note that it is not
necessary to re-import or re-define the sections used in those steps).
41. Click on the Member selection filter drop down menu and select Transverse
Beams. Set the Construction Stage drop down at the top of the Navigation
pane set to Stage 3: Construction. Assign the Nominal section defined in
step 39 to the transverse beam elements at the intermediate diaphragm. Click
on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to remove the
filter.
42. The prestress section file will be assigned to the longitudinal beam members at
the location of the 6 metre wide stitching slab for construction stage 3, because
the stitching slab and diaphragm at the intermediate supports are not active at
this stage.
Ensure that the Construction Stage dropdown at the top of the Navigation Pane
is set to Stage 3: Construction. Click on the Member selection filter drop down
menu and select Longitudinal Beams. Select the Inner Beam Only section in
the Navigation Pane to open the Import file form. Ensure the Beam Section
Reference... drop down menu is set to origin. Box around the members of the
14 inner beams at the location of the 6 metre wide stitching slab as shown
below. Click on OK to close the form.

9-28

43. The edge upstand members have not been defined as being inactive at
construction stage 4, although they are not actually an active part of the
structure at this stage. Hence, the nominal section will be assigned to these
members, rather than defining them as being inactive.
Use the Construction Stage dropdown at the top of the Navigation Pane to
select Stage 4: Construction. Select the Nominal section created in the
previous step to open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Box around the
two rows of edge members in the structure using the mouse to draw a selection
box around each of them. Click on the Yes to All button on the Confirm form
and click on OK to close the form.
44. Finally we will apply member end releases at the ends of the longitudinal
beams to represent the fact that the prestress beams are simply supported until
the diaphragm at the intermediate supports is active.
Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Use the Construction Stage
dropdown at the top of the Navigation Pane to select Stage 1: Construction.
Click on the Add button and select Advanced Beam Set|Releases from the
drop down list to open the Specify Beam Releases form. On the form set
Moment Y to Free. Click on the right hand ends of each prestress beam in
span 1. A small cyan circle will appear near the end of each member selected.
It may be necessary to zoom in on the graphics view to ensure that the
releases are applied to the correct end of the beam element.

The releases are also applied to construction stages 2 and 3 by clicking on the
copy to other stages icon
on the form. Select the Selected Stages radio
button. Tick the tickboxes for stages 2 and 3. Click on OK on both forms to
close both forms.

9-29

45. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to
remove any filter. The advanced model view icon
and the Construction
Stage dropdown at the top of the Navigation Pane can be used to check that
the construction stages have been defined correctly. (see the diagrams for
each construction stage in the introduction to this example).
46. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_3 Construction Stages.sst.

Defining basic loads

47. We will now apply some basic loads to our model, starting with dead loads for
the prestress beam.
Open the Basic Loads tab on the Navigation Pane then click on the Add button
and select Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load from the drop down list
to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to Volume and Load
W1 to -24kN/m3. Change the Name to Prestress Beam Dead Load.
On the graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select
Longitudinal Beams. Draw a box around the internal longitudinal beams to
assign the loads. Click on OK to close the form.

48. We will now apply the dead loads for the concrete slab and end diaphragms.

9-30

Click on the Add button and select Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row
of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to
Length and Load W1 to -4.8kN/m. Change the Name to Span Slabs & End
Diaphragms and box around the beam members in the left and right spans
where the stitching slab is not present.

In the second row of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to
Global Z, Load Value to Length and Load W1 to -31.9kN/m. In the
graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select Transverse
Beams. Box around the end diaphragms. Click on OK to close the form.

49. Next we will apply dead loads for the stitching slab and diaphragm at the
intermediate supports.
Click on the Add button and select Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row
of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to
Length and Load W1 to -4.8kN/m. Change the Name to Stitch Slab & Mid
Diaphragm. In the graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and
select Longitudinal Beams. Box around the beam members where the
stitching slab is located.

9-31

In the second row of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to
Global Z, Load Value to Length and Load W1 to -31.9kN/m. In the
graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select Transverse
Beams. Box around the intermediate diaphragm. Click on the Member
selection filter drop down and select Select All to remove the filter. Click on
OK to close the form.

50. The next step is to assign dead loads for the concrete edge upstands to the
model.
Click on the Add button and select Beam Member Load| Beam Element Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row
of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to
Volume and Load W1 to -24kN/m3. Draw a box around the full length of the
edge beams.

Change Name to Concrete Upstand Dead Load and click on OK to close the
Define Beam Loading form.

9-32

51. Next we will create three SDL cases using bridge deck patch loads.
Click on the Add button and select Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop
down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per
unit area to 4.63kN/m2.
On the graphics window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and
deselect Design / Setting Out Lines, Construction Lines and Beam
Elements. The graphics now shows the carriageway and span end lines.
Click on the bottom edge of the main carriageway, the right hand span end
line, the top edge of the carriageway and the left hand span end line. (See the
screen shot on the following page for details of the carriageway edge
locations). This will apply a patch to the carriageway. Change Name to SDL
Surfacing. Click OK to close the form.

Click on the Add button and select Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop
down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per
unit area to 4.8kN/m2. (You may need to press Enter on the keyboard to
ensure that this value is retained by the form).
Click on the bottom edge of the bottom footway, the right hand span end line,
the top edge of the bottom footway and the left hand span end line. This will
apply a patch to the bottom footway. Change Name to SDL Footway 1 then
click OK to close the form.

9-33

Repeat the process for the top footway. Click on the Add button and select
Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop down list to open the Define Bridge
Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per unit area to 4.8kN/m2.
Click on the bottom edge of the top footway, the right hand span end line, the
top edge of the top footway and the left hand span end line. This will apply a
patch to the top footway. Change Name to SDL Footway 2. On the graphics
window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and select Design /
Setting Out Lines, Construction Lines and Beam Elements then click OK
to close the form.

52. We will now define a SDL barrier load.

Click on the Add button and select Beam Member Load| Beam Element Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row
of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to
Length and Load W1 to -2kN/m.
On the graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select
Longitudinal Beams. Draw boxes around the edge longitudinal beams to
assign the loads.

9-34

Change Name to SDL Barriers and click on OK to close the Define Beam
Loading form.

53. The next step is to define the temporary construction loads. Click on the Add
button and select Beam Member Load| Beam Element Load from the drop
down list to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table
set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to Length
and Load W1 to -5.5kN/m. Draw a box around the beam elements of the left
and right spans where the stitching slab is not present to assign the loads.
Change Name to Construction Loads Spans Slabs and click on OK to close
the Define Beam Loading form.

Now define the construction loads for the area of stitching slab in a similar way.
Name the load Construction Loads Stitching Slab. (For this load the members
below will be selected).

54. The next step is to define the construction stage loading. This defines which
loads are present at each construction stage.
9-35

Click on Open Construction Stage Loading... near bottom of the Navigation

Pane to open the Define Construction Stage Loading form. Click on the Stage
drop down on the form and select Stage 1: Construction. In the Construction
Stages table at the left hand side of the form click on the Status drop down to
select Add Load for loadcase L1.

Click on the Stage drop down on the form and select Stage 2: Construction.
In the Construction Stages table at the left hand side of the form click on the
Status drop down to select Add Load for loadcases L2 and L9.

Click on the Stage drop down on the form and select Stage 3: Construction.
In the Construction Stages table at the left hand side of the form click on the
Status drop down to select Remove Load for loadcase L9 and Add Load for
loadcases L3 and L10.

9-36

Click on the Stage drop down on the form and select Stage 4: Construction.
In the Construction Stages table at the left hand side of the form click on the
Status drop down to select Remove Load for loadcase L10 and Add Load
for loadcase L4.

Click on the Stage drop down on the form and select Stage 5: Construction.
In the Construction Stages table at the left hand side of the form click on the
Status drop down to select No Change for loadcase L1, L2, L3, L4, L9 and
L10.

The Show Overview button can be clicked on to show an overview of the

construction stage loading. There is a scroll bar at the bottom of the form which
can be used to check at what construction stage each load is applied or
removed. Click on the Hide Overview button when you have checked that the
construction stage loading has been defined correctly. Click on OK to close
the form.

9-37

55. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_3 Basic Loads.sst.

Load Compilations
56. The next step is to create dead load compilations for ULS.
Open the Compilations tab on the Navigation Pane, then click on the Add
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Ensure that the Limit State is set
to Ultimate and click on the Find and Add to Table button to input the dead
load at stage 1. Click on OK to close the Compile Loading Patterns form.

Click on the Add button and select Dead Loads at Stage 2. Ensure that the
Limit State is set to Ultimate and click on the Find and Add to Table button
to input the two loads added at stage 2. Change the gamma value in the
second row to 1.3. Click on OK to close the form.

Click on the Add button and select Dead Loads at Stage 3. Ensure that the
Limit State is set to Ultimate and click on the Find and Add to Table button
to input the two loads added at stage 3 and the one load removed. Change the
gamma value in the second row to -1.3 and change the gamma value in the
third row to 1.3. Click on OK to close the form.

9-38

Click on the Add button and select Dead Loads at Stage 4. Ensure that the
Limit State is set to Ultimate and click on the Find and Add to Table button
to input the load added at stage 4 and the load removed. Change the gamma
value in the second row to -1.3. Click on OK to close the form.

Click on the Add button and select Dead Loads at Stage 5. Ensure that the
Limit State is set to Ultimate and click on the Find and Add to Table button
to input the four loads added at stage 5. In all 4 rows of the table change the
gamma value to 2. Click on OK to close the form.

57. The next step is to create dead load compilations for SLS.
Right click on the compilation for dead loads at stage 1 and select Copy to
create a copy of the compilation. Click on the Limit State drop down and select
Serviceability. Click on Yes on the confirm form to change the values of the
gamma factor to the correct value. Click on OK to close the form.

9-39

Now define the serviceability compilations for construction stages 2, 3 and 4 in

a similar way.
Right click on the compilation for dead loads at stage 5 and select Copy to
create a copy of the compilation. Click on the Limit State drop down and select
Serviceability. Click on Yes on the confirm form to change the values of the
gamma factor. In all 4 rows of the table change the gamma value to 1.3.
Click on OK to close the form.

58. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_3 Compilations.sst.

Analysis and Exporting Results

59. Select the menu item Calculate|Analyse. The program will open a form
showing the progress of the analysis. Once the analysis has completed, click
on the Done button.

9-40

60. We will now export the results from the analysis to a .sld file.
Click on the Calculate|Design Load Effects|Select Beam menu item to open
the Select Beam form. Go to the graphics window and click on the beam just
below the centre of the left span. It will be highlighted in red. Click on the OK
button to open the Assign Load Cases form.

61. In the Design Load Case column and select Erection of beam. Click in the
L/C/E column and select Load. Click in the Analysis Load Case column and
select L1: Prestress Beam Dead Load. Repeat a similar process to assign
loads and compilations in the other rows. The ULS Factor in the sixth row of
the table needs to be set to a value of 0.

62. When the table is as shown above, click on the Export Loads to File... button
save the results in a .sld file called My AU Example 9_3 DL and SDL.sld.
Click on the OK button to close the Define Composite Beam Loads form.

Summary
In this example we defined a 2 span grillage consisting of two meshes and then
assigned section properties to it using design beam and design section files.
Construction stages were defined. We then applied some basic dead and
superimposed dead loads to the structure. Load compilations were then defined. The
structure was analysed and the results exported to a .sld file. For a structure such as
this, where construction stages have been defined, one recommended working
procedure would be to follow the steps above and then re-open the file My AU
Example 9_3 Section properties.sst and use the automated load optimisation to
generate live loads for the carriageway on the structure. The results from this .sst file
would be exported to a second .sld file.

9-41

In addition, a line beam module file would be defined and used to analyse the effects
of temperature and shrinkage. Refer to Example 8.1 in this example manual for
information on the line beam module. Note that the differential temperature
parameters would have to be set in the beam module file prior to it being assigned in
the line beam module. The line beam module would be analysed and the results
exported to a third .sld file. The three .sld files would then be imported into the
composite beam file so that design checks could be performed. See Example 5.2 of
this example manual for advice on prestress beam design using the program.

9-42

9.4. Non-Linear Analysis Flat Slab Bridge Deck

Subjects Covered:
Grillage model; Carriageway Definition; Setting Out Lines; Construction Lines; Slab
Properties; Lift Off Supports; Basic Loads; Dead Load Compilations; Live Load
Optimisation; Non-Linear Analysis; Results

Outline

In this example we are going to model a 2 span concrete flat slab structure with a
constant thickness of 600mm. It is to be modelled as a grillage and because the skew
of the deck is 45 degrees (ie. greater than 15 to 20 degrees), an orthogonal mesh will
be defined. The deck will have 7 discrete bearings at each end of each span. The
bridge will have lift-off supports. The left hand span will be 11 metres and the right
hand span will be 20 metres.

Dead and superimposed dead loads will be applied manually. We will then use the
automated load optimisation to create live loads for the model. After performing a
linear analysis of the load cases, we will examine those load compilations for which
non-linear effects are considered to be significant. The Non-Linear Analysis Control
form will then be used to add the concurrent dead and superimposed dead load
compilations to the relevant live load compilations. We will then run a non-linear
analysis and look at some results.

9-43

Procedure
Creating the structure layout
1. We start by defining the alignments and outline of our structure.
Start the program and then create a new structure using the menu item
File|New|Structure. Set the correct analysis type using the menu item
Data|Structure Type|Refined Analysis.
2. Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to 2 Span Flat Slab
Bridge Deck with a sub-title of Non-Linear Analysis. Add your initials in the
Calculations by: field. Click OK to close the form.
3. The next step is to define the alignment of the structure.
Click on the Add button at the top of the Navigation Pane and select Design
Line from the drop down menu. This will open the Define Design Line form.
Click on the green plus button at the bottom left of the form to add a new
segment to the design line. On the Define Line Segment form select the Line
option then click on the Next button twice. Enter (0,0) for the coordinates of
point 1 and (42,0) for the coordinates of point 2. Click on the Next button and
then click OK to define the design line. Click OK to close the Define Design
Line form.
4. Next we will define the carriageway that will run over the structure.
Click on the Add button and select Carriageway from the drop down menu to
open the Define Carriageway form. Click on the Design Line field and select
DL1: Design Line from the drop down list. Set Carriageway Type to Single
and enter the following coordinates in the Offset A/B fields:
(-5.5, -4.9), (-4.9, 4.9), (4.9, 5.5).

The number of notional lanes will automatically update. The notional lanes are
shown in the graphics window with the traffic flow direction indicated by an
arrow. Click on each of the arrows until they are shown as double-headed.
This shows that traffic can flow in either direction along each lane. Click on the
OK button to close the Define Carriageway form.

9-44

5. Next we need to add a sub-model to the structure.

Click on the Add button and select 2D Sub Model (GCS, Z=0) from the drop
down menu. This creates a new sub-model node in the tree within the
Navigation Pane.

6. Next we will describe the edges of the structure and lines along each abutment
and pier using setting out objects and construction lines.
Click on the first node in the sub-model as shown above and click on the Add
button again. The menu list has changed to list objects that can be added to a
sub-model. Select Setting Out Objects to open the Define Setting Out Object
form. Click on the Insert Line Segment button at the bottom left of the form
(this is the small + button). Set the Type to Line then click on the Next
button. Select the start point, angle and length radio button, then click Next.
Enter (0, -5.5) for the co-ordinates of the point, 45 for the angle and 16 for
the length. Click Next then OK to close the Define Line Segment form. Click
OK again to close the Define Setting Out Object form.
Click on the Add button again and select Construction Lines to open the
Define Construction Lines form. On the left hand side of the form there is a list
of line types. Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table.
Click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop
down list. Give the line an offset of 5.5m and press Enter on the keyboard.
Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a new row to the table. Click in
the DL/SOL Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop down list
and give it an offset of -5.5m.
Click on Offset E/W of DL/SOL then click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select
SO1: Setting Out Object from the drop down list. Give it an offset of 11m.
Repeat this process to add a line at 31m. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Construction Lines form. The graphics window will now show an outline
of the structure as shown below.

9-45

7. Click on the File|Save menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_4 Layout.sst.

Defining the mesh and supports

8. We will now begin to define the grillage geometry. The first step is to define
the locations of the span ends.
Click on the Structure node in the Navigation Pane then click on the Add
button. Select Span End Lines from the drop down menu. This will open the
Define Span End Lines form.

Click on the bottom left and top left corners of the left-hand abutment on the
graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this to
locate the pier and second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in the
table as above and on the graphics as below:

Click on OK to close the Define Span End Lines form.

9. The next step is to define the two meshes which make up the grillage.
Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane and then click on the Add
button. Select Mesh from the drop down menu. This will open the Define
Mesh form. Set Name to Span 1 and set Mesh Type to Orthogonal to span.
Set Longitudinal to 7 and Transverse to 2 and then click on the four edges
9-46

of the left hand span, starting with the bottom edge. (You may need to press
Enter on the keyboard in order for the numerical data to be input properly
before clicking in the graphics window). Click OK to close the Define Mesh
form.
Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane again and click on the Add
button. Select Mesh to open the Define Mesh form. Click on the Copy Mesh
Details From button and select M1: Span 1 (2D Model A) from the drop down
list. Change Name to Span 2 and set Transverse to 6, then click on the four
edges of the right hand span, starting with the bottom edge. Click OK to
close the Define Mesh form.
The graphics will now show a plot of the grillage as shown below:

10. Next we will define which nodes in the structure are supported.
Click on the Structure node at the top of the tree and then click on the Add
button and select Supported Nodes from the drop down menu. This will open
the Define Supported Nodes form. Click on the Select drop down menu in the
graphics window and set it to Along Span End Lines, then draw a box around
the entire structure. Click on the Support Type drop down menu on the form
and set it to Lift Off. In the first row of the support table, change the support
conditions so that only the DZ direction is fixed. Change Group Type to
Variable then click on the centre node on the left abutment (node 22).
Change the support conditions for this node so that it is also fixed in DX and
DY. Click on the centre node on the right abutment (node 93) and change the
support conditions so it is also fixed in the DY direction. Click on OK to close
the form.

Assigning section properties

11. We will now assign section properties to our grillage.
Open the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button and select Continuous Slab. In the Continuous Slab Properties form
change the depth to 600, leave the other fields set to the default values as
shown below and then draw a box around the entire structure. Click on OK to
close the form.

9-47

12. Click on the Add button again and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
down menu. This will open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Change
Description to Diaphragm and set both Width and Depth to 10mm. Again,
leave the other properties at their default concrete values and select the
diaphragm members at the leftmost support. Click Yes on the Confirm form to
overwrite these 6 members. Click on OK to close the form.

13. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_4 Section Properties.sst.

Defining basic loads

14. We will now apply some basic loads to our model, starting with dead loads for
concrete.
Open the Basic Loads tab on the Navigation Pane then click on the Add button
and select Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load from the drop down list
to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to Volume and Load
W1 to -24kN/m.
On the graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select
Longitudinal Beams. Draw a box around the entire structure.

9-48

Change Name to Concrete Dead Load and click on OK to close the Define
Beam Loading form. Use the filter drop down menu and select Select All.

15. Next we will create three SDL cases using bridge deck patch loads.
Click on the Add button and select Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop
down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per
unit area to 4kN/m2 and press Enter on the keyboard.
On the graphics window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and
deselect Design / Setting Out Lines, Construction Lines and Beam
Elements. The graphics now shows the carriageway and span end lines.
Click on the bottom edge of the main carriageway, the right hand span end
line, the top edge of the carriageway and the left hand span end line. (See the
screen shot below for details of the carriageway edge locations). This will
apply a patch to the carriageway. Change Name to SDL Carriageway. Click
OK to close the form.

9-49

Click on the Add button and select Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop
down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per
unit area to 5kN/m2.
Click on the bottom edge of the bottom verge, the right hand span end line, the
top edge of the bottom verge and the left hand span end line. This will apply a
patch to the bottom verge. Change Name to SDL Bottom Verge then click
OK to close the form.

Repeat the process for the top verge, changing the Name to SDL Top Verge.
On the graphics window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and
select Design / Setting Out Lines, Construction Lines and Beam Elements
then click OK to close the form.
16. The next step is to create dead load compilations for ULS and SLS.
Open the Compilations tab on the Navigation Pane, then click on the Add
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click on the + button at the
bottom of the form. In the first row of the compilation table use the drop down
list to select the Concrete Dead Load case. Note that the default gamma is
correct at 1.2 and change the Name: to DL ULS. Close the form with the
OK button.
17. Repeat the previous step above but this time set the Limit State: field to
Serviceability (a prompt to confirm changing the load factors will appear) and
the Name: to DL SLS.
18. Click on the + Add button to add a Superimposed Dead Loads compilation.
Click on the + button at the bottom of the form three times. In the compilation
table use the drop down list to select the three SDL load cases and note that
the default gamma is correct at 2. Close the form with the OK button.
The compilation for SDL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. The factors are changed
by the program to 1.3. Click the form with the OK button.

9-50

19. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_4 Basic Loads.sst.

Live Load Optimisation

20. We will now create some influence surfaces and generate live load patterns
using the load optimisation in the program. The first step is to define the
influence surfaces we want to generate.
Click on the Data|Influence Surface menu item to open the Influence Surface
Generation form. Set Pick Mode to Joint then click on the joints at the top left
corner of span 1 and the bottom left corner of span 1 in the graphics window
(joints 1 and 43 respectively). Set the Scope field to Negative in the top two
rows of the table. This will define influence surfaces for negative support
reactions at these two joints.

21. The next step is to analyse the structure and generate the influence surfaces.
Set Generate by to Reciprocal and click on the Analyse button. A progress
box will open. Click on the Done button when the analysis has completed.

22. Next we will compile the loading patterns for the influence surfaces we have
just generated.
9-51

Set Type to AS5100.2 Road then click on the Run Optimisation button to
open the Road Load Optimisation... form. Use the Limit States tick boxes to
create loads for Ultimate and Serviceability. Ensure that the tickboxes for
W80, A160, M1600 and S1600 are ticked.

Once you have set the options, click on the Compile Loading Patterns button
to carry out the load optimisation. The form will change to show the status of
the load optimisation. When it is complete it will show a summary of the loads
generated and the graphics window will show the loading pattern for the
selected influence surface.

Click OK on the Road Load Optimisation... form and click OK on the

Influence Surface Generation form.
23. Next we will solve the load cases.

9-52

Go to the Calculate menu and select Analyse.... The Activate Loading Sets
form will open. Make sure all tick boxes on the form are ticked and click OK.
Click on Yes to All on the Confirm form that opens.

The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the
analysis has completed, this form will show a line of text stating that Non-linear
effects are significant in 8 compilations. Hence, results will not be available for
8 compilations until a non-linear analysis has been performed. Click on the
Done button.
24. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_4 Basic and Live Loads.sst

Results Processing
25. We will now examine the compilations in which non-linear effects are
significant. We will add the relevant dead and superimposed dead load
compilations to those compilations. This is necessary because, by their nature,
the results of compilations in which non-linear results are significant cannot be
simply added together after the linear analysis has been performed. Instead
the loads in those compilations must be added together and then analysed
together in a non linear analysis. When the non-linear analysis has been run
we will look at some of the results produced.
Go to the Calculate menu and select Non-linear analysis. The Non-Linear
Analysis Control form will open. A red circle next to a compilation denotes a
compilation in which non-linear effects are significant. Click on the Include
Controller button to open the Include Controller sub-form. Tick the tickboxes
for compilations C5 and C7. These are ultimate limit state compilations so the
ultimate limit state compilations C1 and C3 for dead and superimposed dead
load are selected using the tickboxes in the Dead Load Compilations
dropdown. Click on the Apply to All Selected Compilations button.

9-53

Click on the Clear Selection button and tick the tickboxes for compilations C6
and C8. These are serviceability limit state compilations so the serviceability
limit state compilations C2 and C4 for dead and superimposed dead load are
selected using the tickboxes in the Dead Load Compilations dropdown. Click
on the Apply to All Selected Compilations button. Click OK to close the subform.

Note that live load compilations C5 and C6 continue to be denoted by a red

circle indicating that they are still non-linear, despite the addition of the dead
loads. However, compilations C7 and C8 are now denoted by a green circle
indicating that they are linear now that the dead loads have been added. This
indicates that the dead loads have counteracted the lift-off effects caused by
the live loads in compilations C7 and C8.

9-54

26. Click on the Analyse button on the Non-Linear Analysis Control form to run
the non-linear analysis. Click on Yes to All on the Confirm form that opens.
Click on the Done buttons on both forms to close both forms.
27. We will now look at the results produced for the analysis run in the previous
step.
Click on the File|Results menu item to open the Results Viewer. Click on the
Result Type drop down and select Compilation from the list of options. In the
Name drop down select compilation C5, set Result For to Joint and Effect to
Support Reactions. Ensure that the Results For drop down menu on the
graphics toolbar is set to Fz. Note that the names of the dead and
superimposed dead load compilations which were defined as acting
concurrently with this live load compilation on the Non-Linear Analysis Control
form are displayed in the Dead Load Compilations field.
The results in the table show that the support reactions at 4 of the nodes are
effectively zero. This indicates that there is lift-off of supports at 4 bearings
when this live compilation is considered together with the concurrent dead and
superimposed dead compilations.

28. Now click on the Name drop down and select compilation C7. The results in the
table show that the support reactions at all of the bearings are positive, nonzero values. This indicates that there is no lift-off of supports when this live
compilation is considered together with the concurrent dead and superimposed
dead load compilations.

9-55

29. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save the model as My AU Example
9_4 Complete Model.sst and close the program.

Summary
In this example we defined a 2 span grillage consisting of two meshes and then
assigned section properties to it. We then applied some basic loads to the structure
and used the automated load optimisation to generate specific live loads in order to
investigate lift-off of supports. After running a linear analysis of the structure we found
that non-linear effects were significant in several load combinations. The Non-Linear
Analysis Control form was then used to add the concurrent dead and superimposed
dead load compilations to the relevant live load compilations before running a nonlinear analysis. We then looked at some of the results.

9-56

9.5.

Offset Beams For Finite Element Decks

Subjects Covered:
Carriageway Definition; Setting Out Lines; Construction Lines; Prestress Beam
Structures; FE deck with Offset Beams; Member Eccentricities; Dead Load
Compilations; Transfer Results to Beam Design

Outline

In this example we are going to model a single span bridge of 21m span. The bridge
structure is constructed with eight I Girder Type 3 prestress beams acting
compositely with a concrete slab. The structure is modelled using a finite element slab
with imported prestress beams which are assigned as Offset Beams. This process
defines the prestress beam as a beam element with an automatically defined vertical
eccentricity relative to the deck. Upstands are added as edge beam members with an
appropriate vertical eccentricity.

The beam data for the 6 inner beams will be imported directly from design beam files
supplied. In addition, an edge section with a width and depth of 200mm will be added
to the design beam file supplied to create a new beam file that will be assigned to the
two outer beams. The slab will have a thickness of 200mm. The deck will have 8
discrete bearings at each end of the span.

9-57

Dead and superimposed dead loads will be applied manually. We will then use the
automated load optimisation to create live loads for the model. After performing an
analysis of the load cases, we will transfer some of the results to one of the beam
files.

Procedure
Creating the edge beam
1. We start by defining a designb beam file that will be assigned to the two outer
beams of the deck.
Start the program and open the data file AU Prestress I Girder Ex 8_1 9_3
9_5.sam supplied.
2. Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to Prestress Beam
Outer Beam. Add your initials in the Calculations by: field.
3. Click on the Data|Define Beam... menu item to open the Pre-tensioned Beam
Definition form. Click on the Define drop down and select Section. This will
open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form.
Click on the Component column in the third row of the table and select In situ
regular. This will open the Define Precast Beam Component form. The
Shape Reference will be set to Rectangle already so enter 200mm in both
the width and depth fields and click OK.
Change the X offset to -400 and Y offset to 1330 to put the edge section in
the correct location. Click OK to close both forms.

4. Click on the File|Save... menu item and save the file as My AU Example 9_5
Outer Beam.

Creating the structure layout

5. Next we define the alignments and outline of our structure.
Start the program and then create a new structure using the menu item
File|New|Structure. Set the correct analysis type using the menu item
Data|Structure Type|Refined Analysis.

9-58

6. Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to Single Span Prestress
Beam Bridge Deck with a sub-title of Offset Beams. Add your initials in the
Calculations by: field. Click OK to close the form.
7. The next step is to define the alignment of the structure.
Click on the Add button at the top of the Navigation Pane and select Design
Line from the drop down menu. This will open the Define Design Line form.
Click on the green plus button at the bottom left of the form to add a new
segment to the design line. On the Define Line Segment form select the Line
option then click on the Next button twice. Enter (0,0) for the coordinates of
point 1 and (21,0) for the coordinates of point 2. Click on the Next button and
then click OK to define the design line. Click OK to close the Define Design
Line form.
8. Next we will define the carriageway that will run over the structure.
Click on the Add button and select Carriageway from the drop down menu to
open the Define Carriageway form. Click on the Design Line field and select
DL1: Design Line from the drop down list. Set Carriageway Type to Single
and enter the following coordinates in the Offset A/B fields:
(-3.8, -3.5), (-3.5, 3.5), (3.5, 3.8).

The number of notional lanes will automatically update. The notional lanes are
shown in the graphics window with the traffic flow direction indicated by an
arrow. Click on each of the arrows until they are shown as double-headed.
This shows that traffic can flow in either direction along each lane. Click on the
OK button to close the Define Carriageway form.

9. Next we need to add a sub-model to the structure.

9-59

Click on the Add button and select 2D Sub Model (GCS, Z=0) from the drop
down menu. This creates a new sub-model node in the tree within the
Navigation Pane.

10. Next we will describe the edges of the structure and lines along each abutment
and pier using setting out objects and construction lines.
Click on the first node in the sub-model as shown above and click on the Add
button again. The menu list has changed to list objects that can be added to a
sub-model. Select Setting Out Objects to open the Define Setting Out Object
form. Click on the Insert Line Segment button at the bottom left of the form
(this is the small + button). Set the Type to Line then click on the Next
button twice. Enter (0, -4) for the co-ordinates of point 1 and (0, 4) for point 2.
Click Next then OK to close the Define Line Segment form. Click OK again
to close the Define Setting Out Object form.
Click on the Add button again and select Construction Lines to open the
Define Construction Lines form. On the left hand side of the form there is a list
of line types. Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table.
Click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop
down list. Give the line an offset of 4m and press Enter on the keyboard.
Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a new row to the table. Click in
the DL/SOL Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop down list
and give it an offset of -4m.
Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL again to add a third row to the table then
click in the DL/SOL Ref column and select SO1: Setting Out Object from the
drop down list. Give it an offset of 21m. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Construction Lines form. The graphics window will now show an outline
of the structure as shown below:

11. Click on the File|Save menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_5 Layout.sst.

9-60

Defining the mesh and supports

12. We will now begin to define the mesh geometry. The first step is to define the
locations of the span ends.
Click on the Structure node in the Navigation Pane then click on the Add
button. Select Span End Lines from the drop down menu. This will open the
Define Span End Lines form.

Click on the bottom left and top left corners of the left-hand abutment on the
graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this to
locate the second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in the table as
above and on the graphics as below:

Click on OK to close the Define Span End Lines form.

13. The next step is to define the mesh.
Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane and then click on the Add
button. Select Mesh from the drop down menu. This will open the Define
Mesh form. Set Member Type to Finite Elements and Mesh Type to
Orthogonal to span. Set Longitudinal to 24 and Transverse to 16 and then
click on the four edges of the deck, starting with the bottom edge. (You may
need to press Enter on the keyboard in order for the numerical data to be
input properly before clicking in the graphics window). Change the equal size
option for the Longitudinal elements to set size. In the Set Longitudinal Size
form that should now be visible set the spacing factor for the two end elements
to 0.5 and click OK to close the sub-form. Click OK to close the Define
Mesh form.
The graphics will now show a plot of the mesh as shown below:

9-61

14. Next we will define which nodes in the structure are supported.
Click on the Structure node at the top of the tree and then click on the Add
button and select Supported Nodes from the drop down menu. This will open
the Define Supported Nodes form. Click on the Select drop down menu in the
graphics window and set it to All Joints, then select the 16 nodes shown
below. In the first row of the support table, change the support conditions so
that only the DZ direction is fixed. Change Group Type to Variable then click
on the node just above centre of the left abutment (node 176). Change the
support conditions for this node so that it is also fixed in DX and DY. Click on
the node just above the centre of the right abutment (node 200) and change
the support conditions so it is also fixed in the DY direction. Click on OK to
close the form.

15. We now need to add beam members along the edges of the slab to represent
the upstand. This is done by clicking on the Sub Model Members node to open
the Define Sub Model Members form so that additional members can be
created.

16. In the graphics window click on the

toolbar button to draw a single member.
Then click on the bottom left corner node of the mesh and then again on the
bottom right node to draw one member. Repeat this on the top edge of the
9-62

mesh. These members can then be split into 24 beam element segments by
using the Split Beam Element task in the Define Sub Model Members form.
17. In the split beam elements form select the at nodes along element option, click
on the edge beam and then click on the Apply button. Dismiss the information
window and repeat for the beam on the top edge of the mesh. Click OK to
close the form.

Assigning section properties

18. We will now import properties to be assigned to our mesh.
Open the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button and select Prestress Design Beam. This will open the Import file form.
Click on the Browse button and open the file AU Prestress I Girder Ex 8_1
9_3 9_5.sam supplied. We will leave the Beam Section Reference... field set
to the default setting of centroid because the beams will be assigned as offset
beams. Change Description to Inner Beam and click OK to close the form.
Follow a similar procedure to import the outer beam file created earlier in this
example.

19. We will now assign the beam properties we imported in the previous step as
Offset Beams.
Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the structure node in
the Navigation Pane and then click on the Add button. Select Offset Beam
from the drop down menu. This will open the Define Offset Beam form. Set
Section Property to Inner Beam then click on the inner beam nearest the top
of the deck (not the edge beam). It will be highlighted in red and an Information
form will appear.

9-63

Click OK on the Information form and click on the Add Additional Offset
Beam... button. A new Define Offset Beam form opens with Inner Beam
automatically selected in the Section Property field. Click on the beam just
below the one previously selected. It will be highlighted in red as shown below.

Repeat this procedure to define the other inner offset beams.

20. When all of the inner offset beams have beam defined click on the Add
Additional Offset Beam... button. A new Define Offset Beam form opens. Use
the Section Property dropdown to select Outer Beam and click on the outer
beam near the top edge of the deck. It will be highlighted in red as shown
below.

Click on the Add Additional Offset Beam... button. A new Define Offset Beam
form opens with Outer Beam automatically selected in the Section Property
field. Click on the outer beam nearest the bottom of the deck. It will be
highlighted in red. Click OK to close the form.
21. The next step is to reverse the direction of the longitudinal beam nearest the
bottom of the deck to ensure that the beam has the correct orientation.
Click on the Longitudinal Beams node to open the Longitudinal Beams form.
Click on the eighth row in the table then on Reverse Order in the list of Beam
Tasks. The direction of the selected longitudinal beam members will be
reversed as shown by the arrow heads on the graphics window. Click on OK
to close the form.

9-64

22. Next we need to define a section property for the upstand.

Click on the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button and select Add|Parametric Shapes. Define a section, 200mm wide by
200mm deep. Call the section Edge Upstand and assign it to the two lines of
edge members and then close the form.
23. We will apply an eccentricity to the edge upstand so that the height of the
centroid of the section is at the same height as it is in the design beam file.
Go back to the Structure tab and click on the Add toolbar button and select
Advanced Beam Set|Eccentricities. Click on the Insert Record button (+)
to add a new row to the eccentricity table. Enter 200mm in the Start Z column
and -100mm in the Start Y column then draw a box around the upstand
members at the top of the deck to select them. Click on the Insert Record
button (+) to add a second row to the eccentricity table. Enter 200mm in the
Start Z column and 100mm in the Start Y column then draw a box around the
upstand members at the bottom of the deck to select them. Call the
eccentricities Edge Upstand and close the form.

24. The next step is to modify the composite members created when the offset
beams were defined to include the upstand edge. To do this, go to the
Calculate|Define Composite Member menu item. Change to a plan view and
make sure the pick mode is set to Beam Element. Select Composite Member
7 and draw a box around the top upstand. Repeat the process for Composite
Member 8, adding the bottom upstand and then close the Define Composite
Member form.

9-65

25. We can check that the structure has been defined correctly by clicking on the
icon to activate the advanced model view. Click on the
icon to activate
the dynamic view function.

26. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_5 Section Properties.sst.

Defining basic loads

27. We will now apply some basic dead loads for concrete to the prestress beams
and edge upstand sections of our model. (Other examples in this manual, such
as those in chapter 10, give guidance on applying superimposed dead loads
and live load optimisation).
Open the Basic Loads tab on the Navigation Pane then click on the Add button
and select Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load from the drop down list
to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to Volume and Load
W1 to -24kN/m3.
Draw a box around the entire structure to assign concrete dead loads to the
prestress beams and edge upstands. (Note that because the deck is a finite
element deck and the load type selected is a beam element load, loads have
only been assigned to the prestress beams and edge upstands. Under different
circumstances the filter tool could be used to ensure that loads are assigned
only to certain members).

9-66

Change Name to Concrete Beam Dead Load and click on OK to close the
Define Beam Loading form.

28. Next we will apply some concrete dead loads to the slab.
Click on the Add toolbar button and select Finite Element Load|External
Load. Draw a box around the entire structure. Change the Load Type to
Force/volume, Direction to Global Z, Load to -24 and Name to Concrete
FE Dead Load. Click OK to close the form.

29. For this example we will create dead load compilations for ULS only.
Open the Compilations tab on the Navigation Pane, then click on the Add
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click on the + button near the
bottom of the form twice. In the first row of the table click on the Load Name
column and select L1: Concrete Beam Dead Load from the list. In the second
row, click in the Load Name column and select L2: Concrete FE Dead Load
9-67

from the list. The default gamma values of 1.2 are correct. Click on OK to
close the Compile Loading Patterns form.
30. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_5 Basic Loads.sst.

Analysis and Exporting Results

31. Next we will solve the load cases.
Go to the Calculate menu and select Analyse.... to run the analysis.

The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the
analysis has completed, click on the Done button.

32. We will now look at some of the results produced for the analysis.
Click on the File|Results menu item to open the Results Viewer. Click on the
Result Type field drop down and select Compilation. Click on the Result For
drop down and select Composite Member from the list. The Name field
should show compilation C1. Click on the Results For drop down menu on the
graphics toolbar. You will see tick boxes next to each result type with Fz
already ticked. Tick the My option as well to add the bending moment diagram
to the plot. For this example the Method field will be set to (2) Original.
Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
Click on De-select all then set Select by to Composite Member. Add
Composite Member 8 to the Selected Groups list and click OK to close the
filter form. Click on the
icon to change the viewing direction.
When you have finished viewing the results click on the Member selection filter
drop down and select Select All to remove the filter. Select File|Close
Tabular Results to close the Results Viewer.

9-68

33. We will transfer results from the analysis to one of the beams defined in the
prestress beam design module.
Click on the Calculate|Design Load Effects|Select Beam menu item to open
the Select Beam form. Go to the graphics window and click on the beam near
the bottom edge of the deck. Note that Composite Member 8 is shown in the
Composite Member field and it is highlighted in red in the graphics view. Click
on the OK button to open the Assign Load Cases form.

34. We will select the dead load compilation we defined and transfer the results to
one of the prestress beam files.
On the Assign Load Cases form, click in the Design Load Case column and
select Construction stage 1A. Leave Comb. set to 1. Click in the L/C/E
column and select Comp. Click in the Analysis Load Case column and select
envelope C1: Dead Loads at Stage 1 ULS. The ULS Factor will be
automatically set to 1.
The Assign Load Cases form will look like this:
9-69

Click on the Transfer to Beam Module... button to transfer the results to the
prestress beam design module.
35. The beam module will display the load effects we have just transferred in
tabular and graphical form.
Click on the OK button on the Define Composite Beam Loads form and click
Yes on the confirmation box which appears. Click on the File|Save menu
item to save the loads in the beam file.
36. Now that the loads have been transferred, we can check whether the beam
has sufficient capacity under all loads. (The beam in this example may not)
37. After weve checked the beam design we can save the beam and structure.

Summary
In this example we defined a single span structure. The slab and beam properties
were imported from design beam files and assigned as Offset Beams. Using this
method to assign the section properties means that the properties of the slab are
assigned to the FE deck and the properties of the prestress beam are assigned to
beam elements which are offset vertically from the soffit of the deck. We then applied
some basic dead loads to the structure. We analysed the load cases and looked at
some of the results for them. We then exported the results to a design beam file
where the design of the beam could be checked following steps similar to those
outlined in example 5.2 of this guide.
Note that the beam files were defined in such a way that the widths of the slabs were
suitable for the widths of the finite elements in the deck to which they were assigned.
Also, the spans of the beams were defined such that they matched the span of the
deck.

9-70

9.6. 3 Sided FE Structure with Soil & Hydrostatic Pressure Loads

Subjects Covered:
Refined Analysis; 3D FE Model; Sub Model Planes; Setting Out Objects; Construction
Lines; Meshing; Support Local Axes; Spring Supports; Filtering; Copying Sub Models;
Conforming Sides; Temperature Effects in FE Slabs; Compilations; Hydrostatic Loads;
Soil Pressure Loads; Transfer Results to .sld File

Outline
In this example we are going to model a single span 3 sided FE structure. Two
models will be defined as described below for two different design situations.

Model 1
This first model will be used to ascertain the load effects in the deck when live loads
and positive temperature effects are combined with dead load and superimposed
dead load. It is assumed that the passive resistance of the soil will be mobilised when
the live loads and positive temperature effects cause a net outward deflection at the
tops of the abutments. Hence, in this model the horizontal stiffness of the soil is
modelled by spring supports to estimate the effect of the abutments on the span
moments. Each abutment consists of a row of piles acting compositely with a
reinforced concrete wall. It is assumed that the piles are embedded in rock at the
bottom of the walls and therefore the base of each abutment is fully fixed in all
directions.
9-71

The deck will be a concrete flat slab of 800mm thickness and the abutment walls will
be 600mm thick. The skew of the deck is 30 degrees, however because the deck is to
be modelled as a finite element structure, a skew mesh will be defined. The
abutments will also be modelled as finite element structures and conforming sides
will be assigned to both sides of the fold where the deck adjoins the abutments.
Defining these conforming sides will prevent spurious rotations of the nodes along
the fold when load is applied. The span of the deck will be 15 metres and height of the
abutment walls will be 7 metres.

The deck has been defined as a pre-prepared file in which the deck geometry,
carriageway, dead and superimposed dead loads have already been defined. After
the abutments have been defined, dead loads and temperature loads will be applied
manually. We will then use the automated load optimisation to create live loads for
the model. After performing an analysis, the results for a composite member that has
been defined in the deck model will be saved in a sld file.

Model 2
The second model will be used to ascertain the load effects in the deck when negative
temperature effects are combined with dead load and superimposed dead load. In this
model it is assumed that the active soil pressure will be mobilised when the negative
temperature effects cause a net inward deflection at the tops of the abutments.
Hence, in this model the spring supports of Model 1 are replaced by a uniform
horizontal soil pressure. A hydrostatic load which varies with depth will also be added
to this model to represent the water contained in the soil. The water table will be 2
metres below the level of the deck. In all other respects, this model will be identical to
Model 1.
9-72

Other models would have to be defined to ascertain the load effects to be used in the
design of other elements of the bridge. As with all of the examples in this manual, this
example is primarily intended to be a guide to using the program. It is recommended
that users consult current technical documentation on the analysis and design of
integral bridges.

Procedure
Setup & Geometry
1. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file AU Example 9_6
Deck.sst.
2. Set the title to Deck with Abutments using the Date | Titles menu option and
put your initials in the Calculations by: field.
3. We will define the abutment at the left hand end of the deck. In the Structure
navigation window click on the Add button and select 2D Sub Model from the
selection list. This will create an entry in the navigation tree and open the 2D
Sub Model Plane form.
4. We wish to define this frame in a plane parallel to the edge of the deck, so click
on the Define button to define a new origin and plane for the sub model.
5. Define the origin by clicking on the joint at the top left corner of the deck as
shown below and click on the Next button.

9-73

6. The orientation of the plane needs changing for the new sub-model so click on
the joint at the bottom left corner of the deck and click on the Next button
twice. Click OK on both forms.

7. Right click on the first node of the new sub model as shown below and select
Rename. Enter the name Left Abutment and click OK to close the sub
form. The deck sub model name can be changed following a similar procedure.

8. Next we will describe the edges of the abutment using setting out objects and
construction lines.
Click on the on the 2D Sub Model: Left Abutment node in the Navigation Pane
then click on the Add button. Select Setting Out Objects to open the Define
Setting Out Object form. Click on the Insert Line Segment button at the bottom
left of the form (this is the small + button). Set the Type to Line then click on
the Next button twice. Enter (0, 0) for the co-ordinates of point 1 and (0, -7)
for point 2. Click Next then OK to close the Define Line Segment form. Click
OK again to close the Define Setting Out Object form.

9-74

Click on the Add button again and select Construction Lines to open the
Define Construction Lines form. On the left hand side of the form there is a list
of line types. Click on Offset parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table.
Click in the SOL Ref column and select SO1: Setting Out Object from the
drop down list. Give the line an offset of -11.547m and press Enter on the
keyboard. Click on Perpendicular to SOL to add a new row to the table. Click
in the SOL Ref column and select SO1: Setting Out Object from the drop
down list and give it an offset of 7m. Click on the OK button to close the
Define Construction Lines form. The graphics window will now show an outline
of the structure as shown below:

9. To create a mesh for the abutment click on the 2D Sub Model: Left Abutment
node in the Navigation Pane again then click on the Add button. Select Mesh
from the drop down menu.
This will open the Define Mesh form. Set Member Type to Finite Elements
and Mesh Type to Skew. Set Transverse to 8 and Longitudinal to 11 and
then click on the four edges of the abutment, starting with the bottom edge and
working around in an anti-clockwise direction. (You may need to press Enter
on the keyboard in order for the numerical data to be input properly before
clicking in the graphics window). Change the equal size option for the
Longitudinal elements to set size. In the Set Longitudinal Size form that
should now be visible set the spacing factor for the two end elements to 0.5.
Click OK to close the sub-form. Repeat this for the Transverse elements.
Change the Name to Left Abutment and click OK to close the Define Mesh
form. Click OK on the Information form. The graphics will now show a plot of
the mesh as shown below:

9-75

10. Click on the File|Save menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_6 Left Abutment Mesh.sst.

Defining supports
11. Next we will define the horizontal spring supports at the abutment. Spring
supports of six different stiffnesses will be defined with stiffnesses in proportion
to the surface area of abutment wall supported. (Note that in many cases the
stiffness of the soil will increase with depth, however for this example a
constant stiffness of 6000kN/m has been assumed over the height of the wall).
Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
Click on De-select all then set Select by to Sub Model Group. Add Left
Abutment to the Selected Groups list and click OK to close the filter form.
Click on the Structure node at the top of the tree and then click on the Add
button and select Supported Nodes from the drop down menu. This will open
the Define Supported Nodes form. Click on the Select drop down menu in the
graphics window and set it to All Joints, then select the top 2 corner nodes
shown below. In the first row of the support table, change the support
conditions so that the DY direction is set to Spring and DX and DZ directions
are free. Set the value in the first row of the Direct Stiffness Y column to 375.

9-76

12. The direction of the spring supports will be defined relative to a defined axis set
to ensure that the springs act in a direction normal to the plane of the abutment
wall.
Click on the
icon to change the viewing direction. Click on the + button
next to the Support Constraints about field to open the Define Support Local
Axes sub-form. Click on the joint at the top right corner of the abutment then
click on the joint at the top left corner of the abutment. Note that the angle in
the Beta field has changed to 60 degrees. Click OK to close the sub-form.
Change Name to Spring 375 kN per m and click OK to close the Define
Supported Nodes form.

13. Define the other five supports as described above. Note that Defined Axes
Set needs to be selected in the Support Constraints about drop down on the
Define Supported Nodes form for each new support type. A summary table of
the spring stiffnesses and the nodes to which they are applied is shown below.
Spring Stiffness (kN/m)

Node Numbers

375

1 & 144

1125

14, 131, 157, 168, 229 & 240

1500

27, 40, 53, 66, 79, 92, 105, 118, 169,

180, 181, 192, 193, 204, 205, 216, 217
& 228

3375

158, 167, 230 & 239

9-77

4500

159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166,

170, 179, 182, 191, 194, 203, 206, 215,
218, 227, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236,
237 & 238

6000

171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178,

183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190,
195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201, 202,
207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214,
219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225 & 226

14. We will now define the fixed supports at the base of the abutment.
Click on the Structure node at the top of the tree and then click on the Add
button and select Supported Nodes from the drop down menu. This will open
the Define Supported Nodes form. Select the 12 nodes at the base of the wall.
In the first row of the support table, change the support conditions so that the
Rotational Restraint is fixed about all 3 axes in addition to the supports being
fixed in DX, DY and DZ. Select Defined Axes Set in the Support Constraints
about drop down and click OK on the sub-form. Change Name to Fixed
Bases and click on OK to close the form.
When these supports have been defined the lower part of the Navigation Pane
will look like this:

Section Properties
15. We will now assign section properties to the finite elements of the abutment.
Open the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button at the top of the navigation window and select Finite Element. In the
Finite Element Properties form, change the Thickness: to 600. Box around the
whole structure and change the Description: to 600mm Abutment. Click OK
to close the form.
16. Next we will copy the abutment sub model to the right hand end of the structure
to define the right hand end abutment.
Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to
remove the filter. Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Right click
on the first node of the Left Abutment sub model and select Copy. In the

9-78

Copy Sub Model form click on the Define button to define a new origin and
plane for the copied sub model.

Click on the joint at the bottom right corner of the deck then click on the Next
button. The orientation of the plane needs changing for the new sub-model so
click on the node at the top right corner of the deck. Click Next on the next
button twice then OK to confirm. Click Next and OK to close the Copy Sub
Model form. (Note that it is important to follow this sequence in order for the
spring supports to be copied with the correct orientation relative to the
abutment wall). Right click on the first node of the new sub model and select
Rename. Enter the name Right Abutment and click OK to close the sub
form. Also, click on the M1: Left Abutment node of the new sub-model to
open the Define Mesh form. Change the Name to Right Abutment and click
OK to close the form and click OK on the Information form.
17. Conforming sides will now be assigned to both sides of the fold where the
deck adjoins the abutments. Defining these conforming sides will prevent
spurious rotations of the nodes along the fold when load is applied.
Open the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button at the top of the navigation window and select Advanced FE
Properties|Conforming Sides. In the Specify FE Conforming Sides form,
ensure that the Both sides of fold radio button is selected and the Stiffness
Factor is set to 1. Click on or near the two folds in the graphics window to
select them. They will be highlighted as shown below. Click OK to close the
form.

9-79

18. Click on the File|Save menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_6 Supports and Sections.sst.

Basic Loads
19. The dead and superimposed dead loads have already been applied at the deck
in the pre-prepared file. We will now apply the concrete self-weight to the
abutments.
Open the Basic Loads tab on the Navigation Pane then click on the Add button
and select Finite Element Load|External Load from the drop down list to open
the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to Force/volume, Direction to Global Z and Load to -24kN/m. Change
Name to Concrete DL Abutment.

Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
Click on De-select all then set Select by to Sub Model Group. Add Left
Abutment and Right Abutment to the Selected Groups list and click OK to
close the filter form.
Draw a box around the entire structure to assign concrete dead loads to the
abutments. Click OK to close the form. Click on the Member selection filter
drop down and select Select All to remove the filter.

9-80

20. In this model we will apply positive temperature loads to the deck as discussed
in the introduction to Model 1. First we will apply the differential temperature
effects. (The temperature input data has been derived using a procedure
similar to that outlined in Example 7.4 of this manual).
Click on the Add button and select Finite Element Load|Temperature Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the
first row of the table set Temperature Type to Membrane, T-Bottom to 5.56
and press Enter on the keyboard.

Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
Click on De-select all then set Select by to Sub Model Group. Add Deck to
the Selected Groups list and click OK to close the filter form.
Draw a box around the entire structure to assign differential temperature loads
to the deck. In the second row set Temperature Type to Gradient and Grad to
17.94. Draw a box around the entire structure again to assign the gradient
loads. Change Name to Diff Temperature +ve Loads. Click OK to close the
form.
21. Now we will apply the seasonal load effects to the deck.
Click on the Add button and select Finite Element Load|Temperature Load
from the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the
first row of the table set Temperature Type to Gradient and Grad to 10.
Change Name to Grad Seasonal Temp Loads +ve.

9-81

Draw a box around the entire structure to assign seasonal temperature loads to
the deck. Click OK to close the form. Click on the Member selection filter drop
down and select Select All to remove the filter.
22. The next step is to create dead load compilations for ULS and SLS.
Open the Compilations tab on the Navigation Pane, then click on the Add
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click twice on the + button near
the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to the table. Set the Limit State field to
Ultimate. In the first row of the compilation table use the drop down list to
select the Concrete DL Deck case. In the second row of the compilation table
use the drop down list to select the Concrete DL Abutment case. Note that
the default gamma is correct at 1.2 and change the Name: to DL ULS. Close
the form with the OK button.
23. The compilation for DL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. The factors are changed
by the program 1. Change the Name: to DL SLS. Click OK to close the
form.
24. Click on the Add button to add a Superimposed Dead Loads compilation. Set
the Limit State field to Ultimate. Click 3 times on the + button near the
bottom of the form to add 3 rows to the table. In the compilation table use the
drop down list to select the three SDL load cases. The gamma for each load is
2. Change the Name: to SDL ULS. Click OK to close the form.
25. The compilation for SDL SLS can be created by copying the ULS compilation
and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. The factors are changed
by the program to 1.3. Change the Name accordingly and click OK to close
the form.
26. Click on the Add button to add an Other compilation. Set the Limit State field to
Ultimate. Click on the + button near the bottom of the form to add a row to
the table. In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the Diff
Temperature +ve Loads load case. The gamma for the load is 1.25. Change
the Name: to Diff Temperature ULS. Click OK to close the form.
27. The compilation for SLS differential temperature can be created by copying the
ULS compilation and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. The
factors are changed by the program 1. Change the Name accordingly and
click OK to close the form.
28. Click on the Add button to add an Other compilation. Set the Limit State field to
Ultimate. Click on the + button near the bottom of the form to add a row to
the table. In the compilation table use the drop down list to select the Grad
Seasonal Temp Loads +ve load case. The gamma for the load is 1.25.
Change the Name: to Seasonal Temperature ULS. Click OK to close the
form.
29. The compilation for SDL seasonal temperature can be created by copying the
ULS compilation and changing the Limit State: field to Serviceability. The
9-82

factors are changed by the program to 1. Change the Name accordingly and
click OK to close the form.

Live Load Optimisation

30. We will now create some influence surfaces and generate live load patterns
using the load optimisation in the program. The first step is to define the
influence surfaces we want to generate.
Click on the Data|Influence Surface menu item to open the Influence Surface
Generation form. Set Pick Mode to Composite Member Element then click on
the element shown below. Set the Direction/Axis field to y and the Scope field
to Sagging in the top row of the table. This will define an influence surface for
mid-span sagging at this element.

9-83

31. The next step is to analyse the structure and generate the influence surfaces.
Set Generate by to Direct (Defined) and set Method to (2) Original. Click on
the Analyse button. A progress box will open. Click on the Done button
when the analysis has completed.

32. Next we will compile the loading patterns for the influence surfaces we have
just generated.
Set Type to AS 5100.2 Road then click on the Run Optimisation button to
open the Road Load Optimisation form. Leave all fields at the default settings.

Click on the Compile Loading Patterns button to carry out the load
optimisation. The form will change to show the status of the load optimisation.
When it is complete it will show a summary of the loads generated and the
graphics window will show the loading pattern for the selected influence
surface.

9-84

Click OK on the Road Load Optimisation form and click OK on the Influence
Surface Generation form.
33. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_6 Model 1 Loads.sst.

Analysis and Exporting Results

34. Select the menu item Calculate|Analyse and click OK to start the analysis.
Click Yes to All on the Confirm form. The program will open a form showing
the progress of the analysis. Once the analysis has completed, click on the
Done button.

9-85

35. We will now export the results from the analysis to a .sld file.
Click on the Calculate|Design Load Effects|Select Beam menu item to open
the Select Beam form. Click in the Composite Member field and select
Composite Member: 1. It will be highlighted in the graphics view. Click on
the OK button to open the Assign Load Cases form.

36. Click in the Design Load Case column and select Construction stage 1A.
Click in the L/C/E column and select Comp. Click in the Analysis Load Case
column and select C1: DL ULS. Repeat a similar process in the other rows.
The ULS Factor in the sixth, eighth, ninth and tenth rows of the table need to
be set to a value of 0. For this example we will set Method to (2) Original.

37. When the table is as shown above, click on the Export Loads to File... button
save the results in a .sld file called My AU Example 9_6 Model 1.sld.

Defining Model 2
38. We will now adjust the model we have defined to convert it to Model 2. We will
start by removing the six types of spring support at the abutment.
Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Right click on the Spring
375kN per m node of the tree and select Delete. Repeat this procedure for
the other five types of spring support but do not delete the Fixed Bases
supports.
39. Now that the spring supports representing the stiffness of the soil have been
deleted we will define some external loads representing the horizontal soil
pressure on the wall.
9-86

NB: In the following steps check the orientation of the horizontal loads applied
to the abutments in the graphics window and compare these with the diagram
in the introduction to Model 2 at the beginning of this example. Alter the sign
convention of the magnitude of the load as necessary to ensure that the loads
have the correct orientation as shown in the diagram.
Open the Basic Loads tab on the Navigation Pane then click on the Add button
and select Finite Element Load|External Load from the drop down list to open
the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Load
Type to Force/area, Direction to Local Z and Load to -21kN/m2. Change
Name to Soil Pressure.

Click on the Filter toolbar button to open the Member Selection Filter form.
Click on De-select all then set Select by to Sub Model Group. Add Left
Abutment and Right Abutment to the Selected Groups list and click OK to
close the filter form.
Draw a box around the left abutment to assign soil pressure loads to the left
abutment. In the second row of the table set Load Type to Force/area,
Direction to Local Z and Load to -21kN/m2 and draw a box around the right
hand abutment. Click OK to close the form.
40. Hydrostatic loads will now be applied to the abutments. The datum height will
be input as being 2 metres below the level of the deck because that is the
height of the water table.
Click on the Add button and select Finite Element Load|Hydrostatic Load from
the drop down list to open the Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first
row of the table set Load w.r.t. datum to Below datum, Density to -10 and
Datum to -2. Draw a box around the left abutment to assign hydrostatic loads
to the left abutment. In the second row of the table set Load w.r.t. datum to
Below datum, Density to -10 and Datum to -2. Draw a box around the right
abutment. Click OK to close the form.

9-87

41. Next we will adjust the differential temperature loads applied to the deck.
Click on the Diff Temperature +ve Loads node of the tree to open the Define
Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set T-Bottom to 1.5
and press Enter on the keyboard. In the second row set Grad to 8.43.
Change the Name to Diff Temperature ve Loads. Click OK to close the
form.

42. Now we will adjust the seasonal load effects at the deck.
Click on the Grad Seasonal Temp Loads +ve node of the tree to open the
Define Finite Element Loading form. In the first row of the table set Grad to 10. Change Name to Grad Seasonal Temp Loads -ve. Click OK to close
the form. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select Select All
to remove the filter.

9-88

43. The next step is to create a compilation for soil pressure and hydrostatic loads.
Open the Compilations tab on the Navigation Pane, then click on the Add
button and select Other. Set the Limit State field to Ultimate. Click twice on
the + button near the bottom of the form to add 2 rows to the table. In the first
row of the compilation table use the drop down list to select the Soil Pressure
case. Set the Gamma factor to 1.5.
In the second row of the compilation table use the drop down list to select the
FE Hydrostatic case. Set the Gamma factor to 1.0. Change the Name: to
Soil & Hydro ULS. Click OK to close the form.
44. The compilation for SLS soil pressure and hydrostatic loads can be created by
copying the ULS compilation and changing the Limit State: field to
Serviceability. Change the Gamma factor in the first row to 1.2. The
Gamma factor in second row is set to 1.0. Change the Name accordingly and
click OK to close the form.
45. We can check that the other compilations have the adjusted loads assigned to
them with the correct gamma factors by opening and closing the Compile
Loading Patterns forms.
46. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_6 Model 2 Loads.sst.
Follow a procedure similar to that outlined in steps 34 to 37 to analyse the
structure and save the results in a .sld file. Note that dead loads, superimposed
dead loads and live loads should be omitted from the Assign Load Cases form
for model 2. The Assign Load Cases form for model 2 should look like this:

9-89

Summary
In this example we defined a 3 sided FE structure consisting of a single span finite
element deck with finite element meshes representing the abutment walls. Support
conditions and loads relating to two different design situations were defined. In the
first model spring supports were defined to represent the stiffness of the soil. The
local axes of these spring supports were defined as being normal to the plane of the
abutment wall. In the second model the spring supports were replaced by a
horizontal soil pressure and a hydrostatic load to represent the water contained in the
soil. The resulting load effects for each design situation were saved in two .sld files.
Load effects from .sld files created in different analysis files can be imported into the
same design beam file.

9-90

9.7. User Defined Vehicles & Convoys

Subjects Covered:
User Defined Vehicles; User Defined Convoys

General background
User Defined Vehicles and Convoys can be used when a vehicle is not included in
the list of default vehicles available in Autodesk Structural Bridge Design 2014. It
is worth noting that a user defined Road vehicle, or a convoy which contains that
user defined Road vehicle, can be selected on the Load Optimisation form.
However, a user defined Rail vehicle cannot itself be selected on the Load
Optimisation form. Only a convoy containing that user defined Rail vehicle can be
selected. Hence, in this example a user defined rail vehicle is created for each
axle bogie, and then a convoy is defined with the vehicles/bogies positioned along
the length of the convoy. This ensures that the orientation of the axles in each
bogie are radial when the convoy is applied to a structure. The structure is curved
on plan.
A 26.5 tonne axle loading configuration for coal wagons and a diesel locomotive
as per a Queensland Rail example will be defined. Each of the 6 bogies in the 2
wagons and 1 locomotive will be defined as individual user defined vehicles.

Outline
A pre-prepared six span grillage model of a 500mm thick, curved slab, as shown
below is supplied with dead and superimposed loads already applied. A convoy
load which will represent 2 coal wagons and 1 locomotive will also be applied.

Details of the characteristic loads are as follows (4 dead loads already applied):
Dead load of the concrete slab is 24kN/m3 (gamma = 1.2)
Ballast is 0.2m deep and has a density of 20kN/m3 (gamma = 1.7)
9-91

 Track and sleepers 5kN/m (gamma = 1.7)

Footway surfacing is 0.2m thick with density of 18kN/m3 (gamma = 2.0)
Coal Wagon & Locomotive Loads as below (assumed gamma = 1.6):

Procedure
1. Start the program and open the pre-prepared data file with a name of AU
Example 9_8 grillage.sst. Close the Structure overview with the Done
button.
2. Change the title of the example to Curved Grillage Model with Convoy Load
using the Date | Titles menu option and put your initials in the Calculations by:
field before closing the form in the normal way.
User Defined Special Vehicles
The dead and superimposed dead loads of the slab, ballast, track, sleepers
and footway surfacing have been applied already in the pre-prepared file. The
bogies for the coal wagons (Slave and Lead wagons have identical axle
spacings and loads) are also already defined in the pre-prepared file to save
time in this example. The bogies for the diesel locomotive, each containing 3
axles, will be defined as user defined special vehicles.
3. Select the menu item Data | Define Special Vehicles... to open the Define
Special Vehicles form.
4. Click on the + button to add a new special vehicle and change the Name to
Diesel Loco Bogie.
5. Set the Number of Axles to 3 and enter a value of 100kN in the Nominal
Wheel Load field. This will ensure that each of the 6 wheel loads has the same
value, although different wheel loads can be entered directly in the Load
column if required.
9-92

6. In the Edit field select axle spacing from the drop down list. On the sub form
that has opened enter values of 1.9 on the second row and 3.8 on the third
row of the table. This will ensure that the axle spacing in the bogie is as per the
vehicle load diagram. Click OK to close the sub form.

7. In the Edit field select track spacing from the drop down list. On the sub form
that has opened enter a value of 1.067 on the second row of the table. This
will ensure that the track spacing in the bogie is 1.067 metres as per the track
gauging. Click OK to close the sub form.

8. In this example the default value for the Overall Width of Vehicle will be used.
Note that the program automatically alters this default value when the value of
the track spacing is set.
9. We will now define the 6 wheels in the bogie as being at the 6 locations where
the blue construction lines intersect.
Select wheel positions in the Edit field and click Yes on the confirm form.

The 6 wheels in the bogie have been defined and are represented by green
circles on the graphics window. Note that as an alternative the wheels could be
defined by clicking in the graphics window at the locations where the blue
construction lines intersect.
9-93

10. Set the Front Axle Overhang and Rear Axle Overhang fields to 2.5m. This
would ensure that the appropriate swept path allowance would be set correctly
if the convoy were to be considered in the Load Optimisation process.
In this example we will use the default value of 0m for the Unloaded Length
Front and Unloaded Length Behind fields. This will ensure that no load is
applied to the structure over that length immediately in front of, or behind, each
bogie/vehicle. However, the unloaded lane length only effects road vehicles
and hence it is not directly relevant to the rail loads specified in this example.

11. Click OK to close the Define Special Vehicles form.

Convoy of Vehicles
The locomotive and 2 wagons will be defined as a single convoy of 6 bogies.
Each of the 6 bogies will consist of a user defined vehicle.
12. Select the menu item Data | Define Convoy... to open the Define Convoy of
Vehicles form.
13. Click on the + button to add a new convoy and change the Name to Coal
Wagon & Loco Convoy.
14. Set the Convoy Type to Non-uniform. This will enable bogies to be positioned
at varying distances within the convoy. Set the Vehicle Type dropdown fields
and values in the Vehicle Separation fields as shown below. These dimensions
position the bogies along the length of the convoy as per the diagram in the
introduction to this example. Click OK to close the form.

9-94

Applying the Convoy Load to the Structure

A rail convoy load can be included in the Load Optimisation process. However,
in this example the convoy load will be applied manually to the structure.
15. Change the navigation pane on the left hand side of the screen to Basic
Loads by selecting the button near the bottom.
16. Click on the +Add button in the navigation window and select Railway Load |
Convoy Load to open a Define Railway Loading form. Use the default values
on the form. Position the Convoy Load approximately by clicking twice in the
north most lane somewhere near the right hand end of span 3 (leave a gap of a
few seconds between clicks). Now set the Chainage in the form to 44m to
position it more accurately. Note that the axles in the bogies align radially with
the curved deck.

17. An appropriate value for dynamic load allowance can be entered in the
Dynamic Load Allowance field. Close the Define Railway Loading form with the
OK button.
18. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
9_8 with Convoy Loads.sst. Close the program.
9-95

Summary
This example provides an introduction to defining user defined special vehicles and
user defined convoys.
The user defined a special vehicle and a user defined convoy. The convoy load was
placed on the structure manually. Users can create loading patterns manually based
on engineering experience. The appropriate factors would be input manually in the
Compile Loading Patterns form.
Alternatively, the convoy could be included in the Load Optimisation process which is
described in Chapter 10 of this manual.
Obviously, any additional wagons or locomotives could be defined and included in the
convoy as necessary.

9-96

10. Complete Examples

Contents
10.1. Three Span Prestress Beam Grillage ...................................................................... 10-3

10-1

10-2

10.1. Three Span Prestress Beam Grillage

Subjects Covered:
Section and Beam definition; Grillage model; Carriageway definition; Setting Out
Lines; Construction Lines; Prestress Beam; Basic Loads; Live Load Optimisation;
Results; Dead Load Compilations; Bending Moment and Shear Force Diagrams;
Results for Multiple Compilations; Enveloped Results; Transfer Results to Beam
Design

Outline

In this example we are going to model a 3 span prestress beam bridge. The bridge
has 6 longitudinal beams as shown in the diagram below.

We will define a section file for the pier, a Super T Beam and a grillage model. We will
then import the section and beam data files we have created into the grillage model
and assign them to the members in the grillage. Dead and superimposed dead loads
will be applied manually. We will then use the automated load optimisation to create
live loads for the model. After analysing the load cases, we will look at various results
and then transfer some of them to one of the beam files. We will then go back to the
structure and save the model.

10-3

Procedure
Creating the pier section file
1. We start by defining the section file for the pier.
Start the program and then create a new section using the menu item
File|New|Section.
2. Ensure that the Design Code is set to Australian Standards. Also, ensure that
the current Project Template is set to Version 6 Examples - AU using the
Options |Projects Templates menu item.
3. Open the Define Material Properties form by selecting Data|Define Material
Properties. Change the Characteristic Strength of the concrete material on the
first row to 50MPa. Open the Reinforcement material on the third row of the
table and change the SLS Limitation Factor to 0.7. Open the Prestress Strand
material on the fourth row of the table and change the Relaxation at Transfer to
20%. Remember to click OK on each of the forms, including the Define
Material Properties form, to save the changes.
Open the Project Templates form using the menu item Options | Project
Templates... . Click on the Create new Project Template button. This will
display the New Project Template form, check the Copied current model
settings radio button and click on OK to close the form.
Click in the Project Template field and type AU Version 6 examples 10.1.
Click on the Export Template... button to open the Export Project Template
File form. Change the file name to AU Version 6 examples 10.1.spj and click
on the Save button to save the project template file. Click on OK to close the
Project Templates form.
4. Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to Pier for 3 Span Bridge
Deck with a sub-title of Section 10.1. Add your initials in the Calculations by:
field.
5. Open the Define Section form using the menu item Data| Define Section. On
the first row of the form select Define Shape and input data as shown below.
The rows in the table are created by clicking on the + button. (Note that two
of the Arc tickboxes are ticked). Click on OK to close the Define Element
Shape form.

10-4

Assign the C40 concrete material to the section and click on OK to close the
Define Section form.

6. Save the file as My AU Example 10_1 Pier.sam and close the program.

Defining the 35m Span Super T Beam

7. We will define a Super T Beam file for use in the grillage analysis model.
Create a new beam file using the menu item File|New|Beam. Use the item
Data|Titles... to set the title as 35m Super T Beam. Set the sub-title to
Example 10.1 and add your initials to the Calculated by data field. Click OK
to close the titles form.
8. Ensure that the Design Code is set to Australian Standards and that the
current Project Template is set to AU Version 6 Examples 10.1.
9. Use the menu item Data|Beam Type to set the beam type to Pre-tensioned
Prestressed.
10. Open the Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form using the Data|Define Beam...
menu item. Set the Beam length to 33.5m and set the Support to beam end
face to -0.75m at Left and Right. This gives an overall span of 35m between
supports.
11. Select Section in the Define field to open the Pre-tensioned Beam Section
Definition form. Select PC beam standard on the first row of the table to
open the Define Precast Beam Component form. Set the Concrete Sections
Library field to Australian Sections, set the Concrete beam range to Super TGirder and the Shape no. to T4 2 Fig H1(B). Click OK on the sub-form.
12. On the second row of the Pre-tensioned Beam Section Definition form add an
In situ regular component of width 2100mm x 170mm. Click OK on the
sub-form and set the Y offset to 1500mm. Ensure that the Stage for the slab is
set to Stage 1A.

10-5

13. Click OK on the forms and save the file as My AU 10_1 35m SuperT.sam.

Defining the 30m Span Super T Beams

14. Open the Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form and set the Beam length to
29.25m. Set the Support to beam end face to 0 at the Left field and -0.75
at the Right field. This gives an overall span of 30m between supports.
15. Click OK to close the form and save the file as My AU 10_1 Span 3 30m
SuperT.sam.
16. Open the Pre-tensioned Beam Definition form and set the Beam length to
29.25m. Set the Support to beam end face to -0.75 at the Left field and 0
at the Right field. This gives an overall span of 30m between supports.
17. Click OK to close the form and save the file as My AU 10_1 Span 1 30m
SuperT.sam.

Creating the structure layout

18. We start by defining the alignments and outline of our structure.
Start the program and then create a new structure using the menu item
File|New|Structure. Set the correct analysis type using the menu item
Data|Structure Type|Refined Analysis.
19. Next we will add some descriptions to the structure which will be shown on all
printed output.
Click on the Data|Titles menu and set Structure Title to 3 Span Prestress
Beam Bridge Deck with a sub-title of Section 10.1. Set Job Title to
Examples Manual and add your initials in the Calculations by: field.
20. The next step is to define the alignment of the structure.
Click on the Add button at the top of the Navigation Pane and select Design
Line from the drop down menu. This will open the Define Design Line form.
Click on the green plus button at the bottom left of the form to add a new
segment to the design line. On the Define Line Segment form select the
Transient Curve option then click on the Next button. Select the points
along length (cubic spline) radio button and click on the Next button. Click

10-6

on the Insert Record button (+) four times to add four rows to the table. Enter
the co-ordinates in the table as shown below:

Click on the Next button and then click on OK to close the Define Line
Segment form. Click OK to close the Define Design Line form.
21. Next we will define the carriageway that will run over the structure.
Click on the Add button and select Carriageway from the drop down menu to
open the Define Carriageway form. Click on the Design Line field and select
DL1: Design Line from the drop down list. Set Carriageway Type to Single
and enter the following coordinates in the Offset A/B fields:
(-6, -6), (-6, 6), (6, 6).

The number of notional lanes will automatically update. The notional lanes are
shown in the graphics window with the traffic flow direction indicated by an
arrow. Click on each of the arrows until they are shown as double-headed.
This shows that traffic can flow in either direction along each lane. Click on the
OK button to close the Define Carriageway form.

10-7

22. Next we need to add a sub-model to the structure.

Click on the Add button and select 2D Sub Model (GCS, Z=0) from the drop
down menu. This creates a new sub-model node in the tree within the
Navigation Pane.

23. Next we will describe the edges of the structure and lines along each abutment
and pier using setting out objects and construction lines.
Click on the first node in the sub-model as shown above and click on the Add
button again. The menu list has changed to list objects that can be added to a
sub-model. Select Construction Lines to open the Define Construction Lines
form. On the left hand side of the form there is a list of line types. Click on
Offset parallel to DL/SOL to add a new row to the table. Click in the DL/SOL
Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop down list. Give the
line an offset of 6.3m and press Enter on the keyboard. Click on Offset
parallel to DL/SOL again to add a new row to the table. Click in the DL/SOL
Ref column and select DL1: Design Line from the drop down list and give it
an offset of -6.3m. This has defined construction lines along the top and
bottom edges of the structure.
Click on Perpendicular to DL/SOL then click in the DL/SOL Ref column and
select DL1: Design Line from the drop down list. Give it an offset of 5m.
Repeat this process to add lines offset at 35m, 70m and 100m. The form
should now be as shown below. Click on the OK button to close the Define
Construction Lines form.
10-8

The graphics window will now show an outline of the structure as shown below.

24. Click on the File|Save menu item and save your model as My AU Example
10_1 Layout.sst.

Defining the mesh and abutment supports

25. We will now begin to define the grillage geometry. The first step is to define
the locations of the span ends.
Click on the Structure node in the Navigation Pane then click on the Add
button. Select Span End Lines from the drop down menu. This will open the
Define Span End Lines form.

Click on the bottom left and top left hand corners of the left-hand abutment on
the graphics window. This will draw a heavy black span end line. Repeat this
to locate the piers and second abutment. The span end lines will be shown in
the table as above and on the graphics as below:

10-9

Click on OK to close the Define Span End Lines form.

26. The next step is to define the three meshes which make up the grillage.
Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane and then click on the Add
button. Select Mesh from the drop down menu. This will open the Define
Mesh form. Set Mesh Type to Splay following edges. Set Longitudinal to 8
and Transverse to 11 and then click on the four edges of the left hand span,
starting with the bottom edge and working round in an anti-clockwise direction.
(You may need to press Enter on the keyboard in order for the numerical data
to be input properly before clicking in the graphics window). Ensure that the
straight tickbox is ticked for both longitudinal and transverse beams. Change
the size field for the Longitudinal spacing from equal spacing to set spacing.
This opens the Set Longitudinal Spacing form. The spacing factors can be set
to 0.5 in the first and last rows of the table as shown below:

Click OK to close the Set Longitudinal Spacing form. Set Name to Span 1
and click OK to close the Define Mesh form.
Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Pane again and click on the Add
button. Select Mesh to open the Define Mesh form. Click on the Copy Mesh
Details From button and select M1: Span 1 (2D Model A) from the drop down
list. Click on the four edges of the central span, starting with the bottom edge
10-10

and working round in an anti-clockwise direction. Change Name to Span 2.

Click OK to close the Define Mesh form.
Click on the sub-model node in the Navigation Window again and click on the
Add button. Select Mesh to open the Define Mesh form. Click on the Copy
Mesh Details From button and select M1: Span 1 (2D Model A) from the drop
down list. Click on the four edges of the right hand span, starting with the
bottom edge and working round in an anti-clockwise direction. Change Name
to Span 3. Click OK to close the Define Mesh form. Click on the orange
Objects tab on the right hand side of the graphics screen and untick
Construction Lines. The graphics will now show a plot of the grillage as shown
below:

27. Click on the Structure node in the Navigation Window and click on Add
Support Nodes. Ensure that the Select field is set to Along Span End Lines
and then select the nodes shown below. With the Group Type set to Uniform
set all restraints to Free except Direct Restraint Z, which is Fixed. Set the
Name to Supports Abutments and click OK to close the form.

Creating the pier and supports sub model

28. The next step is to define the pier sub models. Create a 2D sub model at the
intermediate support nearest the left hand end of the structure. Click on the
Add toolbar button and select 2D Sub Model. Click on the YZ button then
click on the Define button. Click on the node at the edge of the structure as
shown below, click on the Next button and click on the node at the opposite
10-11

edge of the deck. Click on the Next button twice and click OK to close the
forms.

29. Click on the orange General tab on the right hand side of the graphics screen
and tick Show Nodes. Right click on the 2D Sub Model: 2D Model B node,
select Rename and rename the sub model Left Pier. Right click on the 2D
Sub Model: Left Pier node and select Add|Construction Lines. On the Define
Construction Lines form select Vertical line on u and enter an offset value of
6.3m. Also define horizontal construction lines as shown in the table below
then click OK to close the form.

30. Click on Sub Model Members in the 2D Sub Model: Left Pier node to open
the Define Sub Model Members form. Click on the orange Objects tab on the
right hand side of the graphics screen and ensure Construction Lines is ticked.
Click on the Draw Members
draw mode toolbar button and select
Intersection in the Snap field. Draw two vertical members, extending between
the construction lines. Select the lower pile member and click on Split Beam
Element in the Member Tasks list to open the Split Beam Element form. Select
the by specified divisions radio button and enter a value of 10 in the Number
of new elements field. Click on the Apply button and click on OK to close
both forms.

10-12

31. The next step is to copy the sub model to the intermediate support nearest the
right hand end of the structure. Right click on 2D Sub Model: Left Pier and
select Copy from the popup menu. Click on the Define button and click on
the node at the edge of the structure as shown below, click on the Next
button and click on the node at the opposite edge of the deck. Click on the
Next button twice and click OK to close the sub-form. Click on the Next
button and OK to close the form. Rename the new sub model as Right Pier
as outlined above. Changing the view direction to Isometric using the
graphics toolbar button will make the 2 new piers clearly visible.

32. Alterations now need to be made so that the piers are connected to the bridge
deck. Click on the Sub Model Members node of 2D Sub Model: 2D Sub Model
A to open the Define Sub Model Members table for the bridge deck sub model.
Click on the member highlighted below and click on Split Beam Element in the
member tasks menu. Select the at nodes along element radio button and click
on the Apply button. Click OK on the information form and the Split Beam
Element form. Follow the same procedure to split the deck element at the top
of the right hand end pier. Click OK to close the forms.

10-13

33. The next step is to define the support nodes for the piers. Click on the
Structure node at the top of the tree and then click on the Add button and
select Supported Nodes from the drop down menu. This will open the Define
Supported Nodes form. Click on the Select drop down menu in the graphics
window and set it to All Joints, then click on the 2 nodes at the base of each
pier. Ensure that the Group Type radio button is set to Uniform and in the first
row of the support table, change the support conditions so that the DZ direction
is Fixed and the DX and DY directions are Free supports. Name this support
type Pier Base Supports and click OK to close the form.
Again, click on the Add button and select Supported Nodes from the drop
down menu. This will open the Define Supported Nodes form. Draw a box
around the 10 nodes at the lower part of each pier, above the base nodes.
Ensure that the Group Type radio button is set to Uniform and in the first row
of the support table, change the support conditions so that the DZ direction is
Free and the DX and DY directions are Spring supports with a Direct
Stiffness of 500kN/m. Name this support type Pier Spring Supports and click
OK to close the form.

34. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
10.1 Mesh and Supports.sst.
10-14

Assigning section properties

35. We will now assign section properties to our grillage, starting with the internal
beams in the central span.
Open the Section Properties tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add
button and select Prestress Beam from the drop down menu. This will open
the Import file form. Click on the Browse button and open the file My AU
10_1 Span 1 30m SuperT.sam created earlier. Change Description to Span
1 and click on the six inner beams in the left hand end span of the structure.
They will be highlighted in red and their references added to the Assigned
Beams list. Click on OK to close the form.

36. Next we will assign properties to the internal beams in the right hand end span.
Click on the Add button again and select Prestress Beam from the drop down
menu. This will open the Import file form. Click on the Browse button and
open the file My AU 10_1 Span 3 30m SuperT.sam created earlier. Change
Description to Span 3 and click on the six inner beams in the right hand end
span of the structure. They will be highlighted in red and their references
added to the Assigned Beams list. Click on OK to close the form.

37. Now we will assign properties to the edge beams using a section file.
Click on the Add button again and select Prestress Beam from the drop down
menu. This will open the Import file form. Click on the Browse button and
select the file My AU 10_1 35m SuperT.sam created earlier. Change
Description to Span 2 and select the six inner beams in the central span of
the structure. They will be highlighted in red and their references added to the
Assigned Beams list. Click on OK to close the form.

10-15

38. The next step is to assign properties to the diaphragm.

Click on the Add button again and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
down menu. This will open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Change
Description to Abutment Diaphragm and set Width to 750mm and Depth to
1500mm. Leave the other properties at their default concrete values.
Click on the Member selection filter drop down menu and select Transverse
Beams. Click on the abutment diaphragm beams (you may want to zoom in
on the graphics window in order to ensure that you select only these
members). The selected members will turn red and their references added to
the Assigned Members list. Click on OK to close the form.
Follow a similar procedure to assign Parametric Shape section properties to
the transverse members above the two intermediate piers. Set the Width and
Depth to 1500mm for these members and change Description to Pier
Diaphragm.

39. We will assign properties to the transverse members using a continuous slab
property.
Click on the Add button again and select Continuous Slab from the drop down
menu. This will open the Continuous Slab Properties form. Change Depth to
170mm and Description to Transverse Slab. Leave the other properties at
their default concrete values. Draw a box around the whole structure and
answer No to All on the confirmation box that appears. This stops the
program from overwriting the diaphragm section assignments. Click on the
Member selection filter drop down and select Select All to remove the filter
then click on OK to close the form.

10-16

40. Next we will assign properties to the nominal longitudinal members at the
edges of the deck. Click on the Add button again and select Parametric
Shapes from the drop down menu. This will open the Parametric Shape
Properties form. Change width and depth to 10mm and Description to
Nominal. Leave the other properties at their default concrete values. Click on
the Member selection filter drop down menu and select Longitudinal Beams.
Draw a box around the whole structure and answer No to All on the
confirmation box that appears. This stops the program from overwriting the
beam assignments. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select
Select All to remove the filter then click on OK to close the form.
41. Click on the Add button again and select Design Section from the drop down
menu. This will open the Import file form. Click on the Browse button and
select the file My AU Example 10_1 Pier.sam created earlier. Change the
Description to Pier and select the two upper vertical members as shown
below. Click on OK to close the form.

42. Finally we will assign properties to the lower parts of the vertical members (the
piles). Click on the Add button and select Parametric Shapes from the drop
down menu. This will open the Parametric Shape Properties form. Change the
Shape Reference to Circle and diameter to 1500mm. Change the
Description to Pile. Draw a box around the piles at the lower parts of the
vertical members. (Zooming in on these parts of the structure and setting the
Select field to Exclusive Box may assist in this process). Click OK to close
the form.
43. Open the Structure tab on the Navigation Pane. Click on the Add button again
and select Advanced Beam Set|Eccentricities from the drop down menu.
This will open the Define Beam Eccentricities form. Click on the Insert Record
10-17

+ button, enter a value of 438 in the Start Z field and press Return on the
keyboard. Click on the Member selection filter drop down and select
Transverse Beams then box around all of the transverse members except the
diaphragms at the abutments and the piers. Click on the Member selection filter
drop down again and select Longitudinal Beams then click on the nominal
edge beam elements.
Click on the Insert Record + button, enter a value of -312 in the Start Z field
and press Return on the keyboard. Click on the Member selection filter drop
down and select Transverse Beams then box around the four transverse
diaphragms. Click OK to close the form. Click on the Member selection filter
drop down again and select Select All.
We will assign a rotational angle to the axes of the piers to give them the
correct orientation. Click on the Add button and select Advanced Beam
Set|Local Axes. Input a value of 90 in the Twist field and select the two piers
at the upper parts of the vertical members. Click OK to close the form.
The effect of applying these member eccentricities and rotational angles can
be seen by clicking on the
icon to activate the 3D rendered view of the
structure.
44. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
10_1 Section Properties.sst.

Defining basic loads

45. We will now apply some basic loads to our model, starting with dead loads for
concrete.
Open the Basic Loads tab on the Navigation Pane then click on the Add button
and select Beam Member Load|Beam Element Load from the drop down
list to open the Define Beam Loading form. In the first row of the table set
Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global Z, Load Value to Volume and
Load W1 to -24kN/m. Change the Name to Concrete Dead Loads.

On the graphics window, click on the filter drop down menu and select
Longitudinal Beams. Draw a box around the longitudinal beams to assign the

10-18

loads (this can include the nominal edge members). Click on OK to close the
form.

Next click on the Add button again and select Beam Member Load|Beam
Element Load from the drop down list to open the Define Beam Loading form.
In the first row of the table set Load Type to F Uniform, Direction to Global
Z, Load Value to Length and Load W1 to -15kN/m. Change the Name to
Barrier Load. On the graphics window, click on the filter button to open the
Member Selection Filter form. Click on De-select All then select Section
Property in the Select By: field and then select Nominal in the Available
Groups list. Click on the > button and click on OK. Draw a box around the
whole structure and click on OK to close the loading form.

46. We will now create a SDL asphalt load using a bridge deck patch load.
Click on the Add button and select Bridge Deck Patch Load from the drop
down list to open the Define Bridge Deck Patch Loading form. Set Load per
unit area to 1.5kN/m2. (We will not apply any subsidiary loads in this
example).
On the graphics window, move the mouse pointer over the Objects tab and
deselect Design / Setting Out Lines and Construction Lines. The graphics
now shows the carriageway and span end lines. Click on the bottom edge of
the main carriageway, the right hand abutment span end line, the top edge of
the carriageway and the left hand abutment span end line. (See the screen
shot below for details of the carriageway edge locations). This will apply a
patch load to the carriageway. Change Name to Asphalt. Click OK to close
the form.

10-19

47. The next step is to create dead load compilations for ULS and SLS.
Open the Compilations tab on the Navigation Pane, then click on the Add
button and select Dead Loads at Stage 1. Click on the + button near the
bottom of the form. In the first row of the table click on the Load Name column
and select L1: Concrete Dead Load from the list. The default gamma value is
correctly set to 1.2. Click on OK to close the Compile Loading Patterns form.

Right click on compilation C1: Dead Loads at stage 1 ULS on the Navigation
Pane, then select Copy to create a duplicate of the first compilation. On the
Compile Loading Patterns form, change Limit State to Serviceability and click
on Yes in the confirmation dialog. Click on OK to close the form.

48. Next we will define a superimposed dead load compilation for the barrier. Click
on the Add button and select Superimposed Dead Loads. Click on the +
button near the bottom of the form. In the first row of the table click on the
Load Name column and select L2: Barrier Load from the list. Set the gamma
10-20

value to 1.2. Set the Name to SDL ULS Barrier. Click on OK to close the
Compile Loading Patterns form compilation.

49. Right click on compilation C3: SDL ULS Barrier on the Navigation Pane, then
select Copy to create a duplicate of the compilation. On the Compile Loading
Patterns form, change Limit State to Serviceability and click on No in the
confirmation dialog. Set the gamma value to 1.0. Set the Name to SDL SLS
Barrier. Click on OK to close the form.

Next we will define a superimposed dead load compilation. Click on the Add
button and select Superimposed Dead Loads. Click on the + button near
the bottom of the form. In the first row of the table click on the Load Name
column and select L3: Asphalt from the list. The default gamma value of 2.0
is correct. Set the Name to SDL ULS Asphalt. Click on OK to close the
Compile Loading Patterns form.

50. Right click on compilation C5: SDL ULS Asphalt on the Navigation Pane, then
select Copy to create a duplicate of the compilation. On the Compile Loading
10-21

Patterns form, change Limit State to Serviceability and click on Yes in the
confirmation dialog. Set the Name to SDL SLS Asphalt. Click on OK to close
the form.

51. Click on the filter icon and select Select All to remove any filters that may be
applied. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU
Example 10_1 Basic Loads.sst.

Live Load Optimisation

52. We will now create some influence surfaces and generate live load patterns
using the load optimisation in the program. The first step is to define the
influence surfaces we want to generate.
Click on the Data|Influence Surface menu item to open the Influence Surface
Generation form. Set Pick Mode to Longitudinal Beam then click on the lower
edge beam of the middle span in the graphics window. This will define 11
influence surfaces for My Sagging.

10-22

53. The next step is to analyse the structure and generate the influence surfaces.
Set Generate by to Reciprocal and click on the Analyse button. A progress
box will open. Click on the Done button when the analysis has completed.
(You may need to click on the Auto Redraw button in the graphics toolbar to
update the graphics). The graphics window will now show the influence surface
for the first member selected. Change the view to isometric then click in the
Name column on the Influence Surface Generation form. Use the up and down
cursor keys on the keyboard to move through the influence surfaces.

54. Next we will compile the loading patterns for the influence surfaces we have
just generated.
Set Type to AS5100.2 Road then click on the Run Optimisation button to
open the Road Load Optimisation... form. Use the Limit States tick boxes to
create loads for Ultimate and Serviceability. Ensure that the tickboxes for
W80, A160, M1600 and S1600 are ticked.

10-23

Once you have set the options, click on the Compile Loading Patterns button
to carry out the load optimisation. The form will change to show the status of
the load optimisation. When it is complete it will show a summary of the loads
generated and the graphics window will show the loading pattern for the
selected influence surface.

If you leave the Load Optimisation form open, you can click in the Name
column on the table in the Influence Surface Generation form and use the up
and down cursor keys on the keyboard to display the loading patterns
generated for the surface. When you have finished looking at the loads, click
OK on the Road Load Optimisation... form and click OK on the Influence
Surface Generation form.
55. Next we will solve the load cases.
Go to the Calculate menu and select Analyse.... The Activate Loading Sets
form will open. This allows you to select which loading sets you want to solve.
Each time the load optimisation is run, a loading set is automatically generated
for the load cases produced by that run. The list also includes any load cases
not included in a loading set. Make sure both tick boxes are ticked and click
OK. Click Yes to All on the confirm form that appears.

10-24

The program will open a form showing the progress of the analysis. Once the
analysis has completed, click on the Done button.
56. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save your model as My AU Example
10_1 Basic and Live Loads.sst.

Results Processing
57. We will now look at the results produced for the analysis run in the previous
section.
Click on the File|Results menu item to open the Results Viewer as shown
below:

The viewer shows the influence surface for the one of the influence loads.
Click on the Result Type drop down and select Compilation from the list of
options. In the Name drop down select compilation C12, set Result For to
Joint and Effect to Deflected Shape.
10-25

58. Since compilation 12 is for SLS we want to add in the dead and SDL effects at
SLS.
Click on the Dead Load Compilations drop down and tick C2, C4 and C6. This
will add the effects of these two compilations to compilation C12 and show the
displacements for the load cases in all three compilations applied together.

59. Next we will look at the member end forces for a line of edge members.
Click on the Result For drop down and select Beam from the list. In the
Name field, select compilation C17. Click on the Filter toolbar button to open
the Member Selection Filter form. Click on De-select all then set Pick Mode
to Longitudinal Beam. Change the graphics view to plan and click on the
bottom edge beam member in span 2 (do not select the nominal edge
member). Click on OK to close the filter form and change the view back to
isometric. The graphics now shows a plot of the Z member end forces.

10-26

60. We can also overlay a bending moment diagram on the plot.

To do this, click on the Results For drop down menu on the graphics toolbar.
You will see tick boxes next to each result type with Fz already ticked. Tick the
My option as well to add the bending moment diagram to the plot. (Note that if
required, we could tick the tick boxes for the ultimate limit state dead load
compilations in the Dead Load Compilations field to add those compilations).
The scale is a bit small for the plot so move the mouse over the Results tab on
the right hand side of the graphics and tick both the Specify Scale tick boxes.
Enter values of 100kN and 300kNm in the two boxes. The Results Viewer
will now look like this:

61. We can also look at the joint displacements for all compilations for the centre
joint of span 2.
To do this, change Result For to Joint then click on the Edit|Multiple Results
Selection menu item. This will open the Multiple Results Selection and Include
Controller form.

10-27

Click on the Select All button then untick the first six compilations. Click on
OK to close the form and display the displacements for the selected
compilations.
Drag Compilation Name and Including Dead Load Compilations off the orange
bar.

Click on the Customise... button at the top right of the results table. Click on
the button marked press the button to add a new condition then click on the
green text and select Joint from the list of options. Click on the blue text
which says <empty> and type 152 then click on the OK button.

To see which compilation produces this displacement, click on the menu option
to the left of the Reference heading in the results table. Tick Compilation
then click on the menu below and tick Name.

Set the Results For: drop down menu on the graphics toolbar to Joint
Displacement-DZ. Click once on the DZ column header to sort the list from low
to high, then scroll to the top to see the maximum negative displacement for
joint 152.

10-28

62. Next, we will look at some enveloped results.

Click on the Result Type drop down and select Envelope. The Name field
should show envelope E1. Click on the Filter button then click on De-select all,
set Pick Mode to longitudinal beam and click on the beam located at just
below the centre of span 2. Click on OK to close the filter form. Put your
mouse over the Results tab on the right of the graphics and untick the two
Specify Scale tick boxes. Put your mouse over the General tab and tick the
Result tick box. To see only the maximum result, select the Format button
next to Result on the General tab and tick the Maximum only radio button.
This will show the maximum My moment.

63. Finally we will close the Results Viewer.

10-29

Exporting results
64. We will now transfer results from the analysis to the prestress beam design
module.
Click on the Calculate|Design Load Effects|Select Beam menu item to open
the Select Beam form. Go to the graphics window and click on the lower edge
beam of span 2. It will be highlighted in red. Click on the OK button to open
the Assign Load Cases form.
65. We will match envelopes produced during the load optimisation with design
load cases.
On the Assign Load Cases form, click in the Design Load Case column and
select Erection of beam. Click in the L/C/E column and select Load. Click in
the Analysis Load Case column and select envelope L1: Concrete Dead
Loads. The ULS Factor will be automatically set to 1.2 and the SLS Factor set
to 1.
Repeat this process in the next row, setting L/C/E to Load and selecting
envelope L2: Barrier Load.
Follow a similar procedure for the rows in the table until the Assign Load Cases
form is as shown below:

Click on the Transfer to Beam Module... button to transfer the results to the
beam design module. Note a confirm form that may appear and Yes on the
form for this example.
66. The beam module will display the load effects we have just transferred in
tabular and graphical form.

10-30

Click on the OK button on the Define Composite Beam Loads form and click
Yes on the confirmation box which appears. Click on the File|Save menu
item to save the loads in the beam file.
67. The final step is to go back to the grillage model.
Click on the Data|Define Loading menu item to open the Define Pre-tensioned
Beam Loads form. Click on the Interface button to open the Interface form:

Click on the Refined Analysis option and click OK. You will be taken back to
the grillage model.
68. Click on the File|Save As menu item and save the model as My AU Example
10_1 Complete Model.sst and close the program.

Summary
In this example we defined a 3 span grillage consisting of three meshes and then
assigned section properties to it using beam files created in a previous example. We
then applied some basic loads to the structure and used the automated load
optimisation to generate live loads for the carriageway on the structure. We then
analysed the load cases and looked at the results for them. We then exported the
results to a beam file to check its design.

10-31

10-32